JP7237802B2 - game machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a game machine such as a pachinko game machine.

As a game machine, a game medium such as a game ball is shot into a game area by a shooting device, and when the game medium enters a prize winning area such as a winning hole provided in the game area and an execution condition (starting condition) is established, A pachinko machine that enhances game interest by a so-called variable display game in which a plurality of types of identification information (hereinafter referred to as display patterns) are variably displayed on a variable display device and whether or not to give a predetermined game value is determined based on the display results. There is a game machine. In such a pachinko game machine, when the stop pattern mode when the variable display of the display patterns in the variable display game is completely stopped becomes a specific display mode, an advantageous state (jackpot game state) is brought to the player. In the jackpot game state, a round game in which the jackpot is opened can be repeatedly executed up to a predetermined upper limit number of times.

As such a gaming machine, a gaming machine has been proposed in which the opening of the big winning opening is earlier than the display switching timing of the number of rounds (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

JP 2017-104625 A

However, in the gaming machine described in Patent Literature 1, although the possibility of winning a prize in the big winning slot increases when the game medium is shot before the number of rounds is displayed, the number of winning balls is preferably obtained. is still insufficient from the viewpoint of displaying , and there is a possibility that the player may feel uneasy and lose interest in the game.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of preventing a decline in interest in gaming.

(A) In order to achieve the above object, the gaming machine according to the present invention
A gaming machine that performs variable display and can be controlled in an advantageous state for a player,
display means;
light emitting means;
hold storage means capable of storing information on variable display as hold information;
a notification effect executing means capable of executing a notification effect for notifying that the suspension information corresponding to being controlled to the advantageous state is stored in the suspension storage means when being controlled to the advantageous state;
specific display means capable of displaying a specific display when the notification effect is executed;
erasing effect executing means capable of executing a specific display erasing effect for erasing the specific display at a predetermined timing of the variable display corresponding to the specific display;
variable winning means capable of changing between a first state in which the game medium is easy to win and a second state in which the game medium cannot or is difficult to win;
A control means capable of executing a round game that changes the variable winning means to the first state,
when the specific display is not erased at the predetermined timing due to the occurrence of a predetermined event when the specific display is displayed, the specific display can be erased at a specific timing after the predetermined timing;
When the round game is played, after a predetermined period of time after the variable winning means changes from the second state to the first state, a given amount display regarding the given amount of game value is displayed;
when the game medium does not win the variable winning means within the predetermined period, a predetermined display corresponding to the fact that the game value is not awarded at the start of the display of the awarded amount can be displayed;
When the game medium wins the variable winning means within the predetermined period, a count-up display corresponding to the awarding of the game value is performed at the start of the display of the award amount, and then a specific display different from the predetermined display is displayed. is viewable,
It is characterized by
Furthermore, (1) in order to achieve the above object, the gaming machine according to the present invention is
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1, etc.) that can be controlled in an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player,
Display means (for example, the effect control CPU 120 that instructs the display content to the image display device 5, etc.),
Variable winning means (e.g., special variable winning ball device 7) capable of changing between a first state in which the game medium is easy to win and a second state in which the game medium cannot or is difficult to win,
Control means (for example, A CPU 103 etc. that performs a round game) and
The display means is
It is possible to display a given amount display related to the given amount of game value given when the game medium wins to the variable winning means (for example, display the number of wins),
When the first round game is played out of the plurality of round games, the given amount display is displayed after a predetermined period of time after the variable winning means changes from the second state to the first state. (For example, in the first round, display the number of wins after a predetermined period of time has passed after the big prize opening is opened),
If the game medium does not win the variable prize winning means within the predetermined period, a predetermined display corresponding to the fact that the game value is not given is displayed as the display of the amount to be given after the predetermined period has elapsed (for example, the number of wins). display "0000" as a display, etc.),
When the game medium wins the variable winning means within the predetermined period, a special display different from the predetermined display is displayed as the display of the awarded amount after the lapse of the predetermined period (for example, "0015" is displayed as the number of wins). etc./In addition, special indications are sometimes called specific indications in the examples, but they have the same meaning.),
moreover,
A pending storage means (for example, a pending information storage area for effect control) capable of storing information related to variable display as pending information;
When controlled to the advantageous state, a notification effect (for example, continuous notification on hold) for notifying that the hold information corresponding to the control to the advantageous state is stored in the hold storage means can be executed. Production execution means (for example, step 010AKS004, production control CPU 120 that executes the processing of step 010AKS007),
Specific display means (for example, the effect control CPU 120 that executes the processing of step 010AKS007) capable of displaying a specific display when the notification effect is executed;
At a predetermined timing (for example, timing TA, TB, or TC) of the variable display corresponding to the specific display, erasing effect execution means (for example, step 010AKS024, step 010AKS024, etc.) capable of executing a specific display erasing effect (for example, erasing effect) for erasing the specific display Effect control CPU 120) that executes the processing of step 010AKS025,
If the specific display is not erased at the predetermined timing due to the occurrence of a predetermined event (for example, a missing variation pattern command or an error in the erasing effect setting process) while the specific display is being displayed, the specific display is not erased at the predetermined timing. Special control for erasing the specific display can be executed at a later specific timing (for example, timing TD) (for example, the processing of step 010AKS045 can be executed).
It is characterized by

According to such a configuration, since a special display is performed when a prize is won within a predetermined period, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game without making the player feel uneasy. Furthermore, according to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling distrustful of the player due to the continuous display of the specific display, and it is possible to suitably execute the notification effect.

Further, the embodiments for carrying out the invention described later include inventions according to the following means 2 to 6. Conventionally, in a game machine that executes a holding continuous notification effect as shown in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2018-99309 in a game machine, it corresponds to the fact that the holding continuous notification effect is executed until the next big hit. When the specific display is displayed, if the specific display is not normally erased due to a defect or the like, there is a possibility that the player may feel distrust. This has been made in view of the above-mentioned actual situation, and there is a need to provide a gaming machine capable of suitably executing an effect.
(2) In order to achieve the above object, the gaming machine according to the present invention is
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the characteristic part 010AK) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a big win game state, a small win game state) that is advantageous to a player,
A pending storage means (for example, a pending information storage area for effect control) capable of storing information related to variable display as pending information;
When controlled to the advantageous state, a notification effect (for example, continuous notification on hold) for notifying that the hold information corresponding to the control to the advantageous state is stored in the hold storage means can be executed. Production execution means (for example, step 010AKS004, production control CPU 120 that executes the processing of step 010AKS007),
Specific display means (for example, the effect control CPU 120 that executes the processing of step 010AKS007) capable of displaying a specific display when the notification effect is executed;
At a predetermined timing (for example, timing TA, TB, or TC) of the variable display corresponding to the specific display, erasing effect execution means (for example, step 010AKS024, step 010AKS024, etc.) capable of executing a specific display erasing effect (for example, erasing effect) for erasing the specific display Effect control CPU 120) that executes the processing of step 010AKS025),
If the specific display is not erased at the predetermined timing due to the occurrence of a predetermined event (for example, a missing variation pattern command or an error in the erasing effect setting process) while the specific display is being displayed, the specific display is not erased at the predetermined timing. Special control can be executed to erase the specific display at a later specific timing (for example, timing TD) (for example, the process of step 010AKS045 can be executed).
According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling distrustful of the player due to the continuous display of the specific display, and to suitably execute the notification effect.

(3) In the gaming machine described in (2) above,
game control means (for example, the main board 11, the game control microcomputer 100, and the CPU 103) for controlling the progress of the game;
Production control means (for example, production control board 12, production control CPU 120) for controlling production based on information from the game control means,
When the specific display is not erased at the predetermined timing, the effect control means can not normally receive information (for example, a variation pattern designation command) at the start of the variable display from the game control means, the game control The special control may be executed based on information (for example, winning start designation command) received from the means at the start of the advantageous state.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling distrustful of the player due to the continuous display of the specific display, and to suitably execute the notification effect.

(4) In the gaming machine of (3) above,
The effect at the start of the advantageous state, which is executed based on the information received at the start of the advantageous state, is set to have a higher display priority than the specific display,
The specific display may be erased (for example, FIGS. 14-9(H) to 14-9(J)) during the effect period at the start of the advantageous state.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling distrustful of the player due to the continuous display of the specific display, and to suitably execute the notification effect.

(5) In any one of the gaming machines (2) to (4) above,
There are a plurality of predetermined timings,
The specific timing may be a timing later than the last timing among a plurality of predetermined timings (eg, FIG. 14-4).
According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable due to the specific display being erased in a situation where the execution timing of the specific display erasing effect still remains.

(6) In the gaming machine according to any one of (2) to (5) above,
The specific display means can display the specific display in one of a plurality of display modes including at least a first mode and a second mode that is more advantageous to the player than the first mode. ,
When the specific display is displayed in the second mode and the specific display is not erased at the predetermined timing due to the occurrence of a predetermined event, the display mode of the specific display is changed to the first display mode at the specific timing. It may be possible to execute control to change from the mode to the second mode (eg, FIGS. 14-11).
According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling distrustful of the player due to the continuous display of the specific display of the second mode, and it is possible to suitably execute the notification effect.

The present invention may include only the matters specifying the invention described in the claims of the present invention, or may include the matters specifying the invention described in the claims of the present invention as well as the matters specifying the invention other than the matters specifying the invention. It can be anything.

It is a front view of the pachinko game machine in this embodiment. It is a rear perspective view of the pachinko game machine in this embodiment. It is a configuration diagram showing various control boards and the like mounted in the pachinko game machine. It is a flow chart which shows an example of game control main processing. It is a flow chart showing an example of timer interrupt processing for game control. It is a flow chart which shows an example of special design process processing. FIG. 9 is an explanatory diagram showing a display result determination table; It is a flow chart which shows an example of production control main processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of production control process processing. It is a figure which shows the lighting example of a game effect lamp. It is a flow chart which shows an example of special design stop processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of jackpot opening pre-processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of processing during jackpot opening. 6 is a flowchart showing an example of various display processing; It is a timing chart showing the opening timing of the big winning opening, the timing of various displays, and the like. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of effect display on the image display device, an open/closed state of the big prize opening, and lighting states of various lamps; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of effect display on the image display device, an open/closed state of the big prize opening, and lighting states of various lamps; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of effect display on the image display device, an open/closed state of the big prize opening, and lighting states of various lamps; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of effect display on the image display device, an open/closed state of the big prize opening, and lighting states of various lamps; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of effect display on the image display device, an open/closed state of the big prize opening, and lighting states of various lamps; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of effect display on the image display device, an open/closed state of the big prize opening, and lighting states of various lamps; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of effect display on the image display device, an open/closed state of the big prize opening, and lighting states of various lamps; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of effect display on the image display device, an open/closed state of the big prize opening, and lighting states of various lamps; It is a diagram showing an example of a state in which the game ball is sandwiched between the special variable winning ball device. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of effect display on the image display device, an open/closed state of the big prize opening, and lighting states of various lamps; It is a timing chart showing the opening timing of the big winning opening, the timing of various displays, and the like. 6 is a flowchart showing an example of various display processing; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of effect display on the image display device, an open/closed state of the big prize opening, and lighting states of various lamps; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of effect display on the image display device, an open/closed state of the big prize opening, and lighting states of various lamps; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of effect display; It is a flow chart which shows an example of game control main processing. It is a front view of the pachinko game machine 1 in the characteristic portion 152F. It is a figure which shows a hit classification table. FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram showing each random number; It is explanatory drawing which shows a hit determination table and a big-hit type determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the content of the production|presentation control command. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the content of the production|presentation control command. It is a flowchart which shows a starting port switch passage process. It is a flow chart which shows special design normal processing. It is a flow chart which shows small hit opening pre-processing. It is a flowchart which shows processing during small hit opening. It is a flow chart which shows small hit end processing. It is a display screen figure which shows the production example of information production|presentation. It is explanatory drawing which shows the information production|presentation execution presence/absence determination table, information production|presentation content determination table, V mode determination table, a hit suggestion performance execution determination table, and a hit no suggestion performance execution determination table. It is a flow chart which shows information production processing. It is a flowchart which shows the holding continuous notification setting process of the characteristic part 003AK. It is a figure which shows an example of the reservation information storage area for production|presentation control of the characteristic part 003AK. It is a figure which shows the determination ratio in the holding continuous notification process of the characteristic part 003AK. It is a timing chart showing the execution timing of the erasing effect of the characteristic portion 003AK. It is a timing chart which shows the execution timing of the change production|presentation of the characteristic part 003AK. It is a flowchart etc. which show the change production|presentation setting process of the characteristic part 003AK. It is a flow chart which shows erasing effect processing of characteristic part 003AK. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation operation example of characteristic part 003AK. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation operation example of characteristic part 003AK. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation operation example of characteristic part 003AK. It is a flowchart which shows the change production|presentation setting process of the modification of the characteristic part 003AK. It is a flowchart which shows the holding continuous notification setting process of the characteristic part 010AK. It is a figure which shows an example of the pending|holding information storage area for production|presentation control of the characteristic part 010AK. It is a figure which shows the determination ratio in the holding continuous-notification setting process of the characteristic part 010AK. It is a timing chart showing the execution timing of the erasing effect of the characteristic portion 010AK. It is a flow chart etc. which show erasing effect setting processing of characteristic part 010AK. It is a flow chart which shows erasing effect processing of characteristic part 010AK. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd elimination effect setting process of the characteristic part 010AK. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation operation example of the characteristic part 010AK. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation operation example of the characteristic part 010AK. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation operation example of the characteristic part 010AK. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation operation example of the characteristic part 010AK.

(Basic explanation)
First, the basic configuration and control of the pachinko game machine 1 (also the configuration and control of a general pachinko game machine) will be described.

(Structure of pachinko machine 1, etc.)
FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko game machine 1, showing the arrangement layout of the main members. A pachinko game machine (game machine) 1 is roughly composed of a game board (gauge board) 2 forming a game board surface and a game machine frame (underframe) 3 supporting and fixing the game board 2 . A game area is formed in the game board 2, and a game ball as a game medium is shot from a predetermined ball shooting device and hit into the game area.

The "variable display" of special symbols means, for example, that a plurality of types of special symbols are variably displayed (the same applies to other symbols described later). Variations include updating display of a plurality of patterns, scrolling display of a plurality of patterns, deformation of one or more patterns, enlargement/reduction of one or more patterns, and the like. In the variation of special symbols and normal symbols, which will be described later, a plurality of types of special symbols or normal symbols are updated and displayed. In the variation of decorative patterns, which will be described later, a plurality of types of decorative patterns are scrolled or updated, and one or more decorative patterns are deformed or enlarged/reduced. Note that the variation also includes a mode in which a certain symbol is displayed blinking. At the end of the variable display, a predetermined special symbol is stopped and displayed (also referred to as derivation or derivation display) as a display result (the same applies to variable display of other symbols to be described later). Variable display may be expressed as variable display or variation.

The special symbols variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A are also called "first special symbols", and the special symbols variably displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B are also called "second special symbols". Also, a special game using the first special game is called a "first special game", and a special game using the second special game is called a "second special game". In addition, the number of special symbol display devices that variably display the special symbols may be one.

An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the game area on the game board 2 . The image display device 5 is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display) or an organic EL (Electro Luminescence), and displays various effects images. The image display device 5 may be composed of a projector and a screen. Various effect images are displayed on the image display device 5 .

For example, on the screen of the image display device 5, in synchronism with the first special game and the second special game, a plurality of types of decorative patterns (such as patterns showing numbers) as decoration identification information different from the special patterns. variable display is performed. Here, in synchronism with the first special game or the second special game, decorative symbols are variably displayed (for example, vertically direction scroll display and update display). It should be noted that the variable display of the special game and the decoration pattern that are executed in synchronization are also collectively referred to simply as the variable display.

A display area may be provided on the screen of the image display device 5 for displaying suspended display corresponding to the variable display whose execution is suspended and active display corresponding to the variable display being executed. Suspended display and active display are also collectively referred to as variable display corresponding display corresponding to variable display.

The number of variable representations that are reserved is also referred to as the number of reserved memories. The reserved memory number corresponding to the first special game is also referred to as the first reserved memory number, and the reserved memory number corresponding to the second special game is also referred to as the second reserved memory number. The sum of the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number is also referred to as the total reserved memory number.

At predetermined positions on the game board 2, a first suspension indicator 25A and a second suspension indicator 25B each including a plurality of LEDs are provided. The first pending display 25A displays the first pending memory number by the number of lit LEDs. The second pending display 25B displays the number of second pending memories according to the number of lit LEDs.

A winning ball device 6A is provided below the image display device 5, and a variable winning ball device 6B is provided on the right side of the winning ball device 6A.

Winning ball device 6A, for example, forms a first starting winning opening that is kept in a constant open state in which game balls can enter, for example, by a predetermined ball receiving member. When a game ball enters the first start winning hole, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls are paid out, and the first special game can be started.

The variable winning ball device 6B (ordinary electric accessory) forms a second starting winning hole that changes between a closed state and an open state by a solenoid 81 (see FIG. 3). The variable winning ball device 6B is provided with, for example, an electric tulip-shaped accessory having a pair of movable winglets. comes close to the winning ball device 6A, and the closed state in which the game balls do not enter the second starting winning opening (also referred to as the second starting winning opening being closed). On the other hand, the variable winning ball device 6B is in an open state in which the game ball can enter the second start winning opening (second start It is also said that the prize-winning mouth is open.). When the game ball enters the second start winning hole, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls are paid out, and the second special game can be started. Note that the variable winning ball device 6B may be any device that changes between a closed state and an open state, and is not limited to a device provided with an electric tulip-shaped accessory.

Predetermined positions of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, three positions on the lower left side of the game area and one position above the variable winning ball device 6B) are always kept in a constant open state by predetermined ball receiving members. A general winning opening 10 is provided. In this case, when entering any of the general winning openings 10, a predetermined number (for example, three) of game balls are paid out as prize balls.

A special variable winning ball device 7 having a large winning opening is provided between the winning ball device 6A and the variable winning ball device 6B. The special variable winning ball device 7 has a large winning opening door that is driven to open and close by a solenoid 82 (see FIG. 3). Form.

As an example, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the big winning door (for the special electric accessory) is in the OFF state, the big winning door closes the big winning door, and the game ball is pushed out. You will not be able to enter (pass through) the prize gate. On the other hand, in the special variable prize winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the special prize winning port door is in the ON state, the special prize winning port door opens the big prize winning port, making it easier for the game ball to enter the big prize winning port. Become.

When game balls enter the big winning hole, a predetermined number (for example, 15) of game balls are paid out as prize balls. When the game balls enter the big winning hole, more prize balls are paid out than when the game balls enter the first starting winning hole, the second starting winning hole and the general winning hole 10, for example.

Entering a game ball into each winning hole including the general winning hole 10 is also called "winning". In particular, winning a prize in a starting opening (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening) is also referred to as starting winning.

A normal symbol display 20 is provided at a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, the left lower part of the game area). As an example, the normal symbol display device 20 is composed of a 7-segment LED or the like, and performs variable display of normal symbols as a plurality of types of normal identification information different from special symbols. The normal symbols are represented by numbers indicating "0" to "9", lighting patterns such as "-", and the like. The normal pattern may include a pattern in which all the LEDs are turned off. Such a variable display of normal patterns is also called a normal pattern game.

A passage gate 41 through which game balls can pass is provided on the right side of the image display device 5 . Based on the game ball passing through the passage gate 41, the normal game is executed.

Below the normal pattern display 20, a normal pattern holding display 25C is provided. The general pattern suspension display 25C includes, for example, four LEDs, and displays the normal pattern suspension storage number, which is the number of general pattern games whose execution is suspended, by the number of lit LEDs.

The surface of the game board 2 is provided with, in addition to the above configuration, a windmill for changing the flowing direction and speed of the game ball and a large number of obstacle nails. At the bottom of the game area, an out port is provided for taking in game balls that have not entered any of the winning ports.

Speakers 8L and 8R for reproducing and outputting sound effects and the like are provided at upper left and right positions of the frame 3 for a game machine. A main lamp 9a is provided above the image display device 5 in the game machine frame 3, and frame lamps 9b are provided to the left and right of the main lamp 9a so as to surround the game area. As shown, the frame lamps 9b include a lower left lamp 9bL1 in the lower left portion, an upper left lamp 9bL2 in the upper left portion, a lower right lamp 9bR1 in the lower right portion, and an upper right lamp 9bR2 in the upper right portion. Furthermore, an attacker lamp 9c is provided at a position near the special variable winning ball device 7 on the game board 2. As shown in FIG. Further, speaker lamps 9eL and 9eR are provided corresponding to the speaker 8L and 8R portions, respectively. Below the image display device 5 on the game board 2, a display device lower lamp 9f is provided. There is Further, in the vicinity of the general winning openings 10 provided at the lower left three places of the game area, general winning opening vicinity lamps 9g are provided.

At a predetermined position of the game board 2 (a position above the image display device 5 in FIG. 1), a movable body 32 that operates according to the performance is provided. Further, the movable body 32 is provided with a movable body lamp 9d. The movable body lamp 9d, the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacker lamp 9c, the speaker lamps 9eL and 9eR, the display device lower lamp 9f, and the general prize winning opening vicinity lamp 9g are collectively referred to as the game effect lamp 9. There is The main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacker lamp 9c, movable body lamp 9d, speaker lamps 9eL and 9eR, display device lower lamp 9f, and general winning opening vicinity lamp 9g are configured to include LEDs.

A ball hitting operation handle (operation knob) 30 operated by a player or the like to shoot a game ball toward the game area from the ball shooting device is provided at the lower right portion of the game machine frame 3 .

At a predetermined position of the game machine frame 3 below the game area, game balls paid out as prize balls and game balls lent from a predetermined ball lending machine are held (stored) so as to be supplied to the ball shooting device. ) is provided with a batted ball supply plate (upper plate). Below the upper plate, there is provided a batted ball supply plate (lower plate) from which prize balls are dispensed when the upper plate is full.

A stick controller 31A that can be held and tilted by a player is attached to a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the game area. The stick controller 31A is provided with a trigger button that can be pressed by the player. An operation on the stick controller 31A is detected by a controller sensor unit 35A (see FIG. 3).

At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the game area, there is provided a push button 31B that allows the player to perform a predetermined instruction operation such as a pressing operation. An operation on the push button 31B is detected by a push sensor 35B (see FIG. 3).

The pachinko game machine 1 is provided with a stick controller 31A and a push button 31B as detection means for detecting actions (operations, etc.) of the player, but detection means other than these may be provided.

FIG. 2 is a rear perspective view of the pachinko gaming machine 1. FIG. A main substrate 11 housed in a substrate case 201 is mounted on the back surface of the pachinko game machine 1. - 特許庁A setting key 51 and a setting switch 52 are provided on the main board 11 . The setting key 51 functions as a lock switch for switching to a setting change state or a setting confirmation state. The setting changeover switch 52 functions as a setting switch for changing set values such as the probability of winning a big hit and the rate of winning balls in the setting change state. The setting key 51 and the setting changeover switch 52 may be attached to the outside of the main board 11 , such as at a predetermined position on the power supply board 17 .

A display monitor 29 is arranged in the center of the back surface of the main board 11 , and a display changeover switch 31 is arranged on the side of the display monitor 29 . The display monitor 29 may be configured using, for example, a 7-segment LED display device. The display monitor 29 and the display changeover switch 31 are arranged in front of the main board 11 when viewing the back side of the game board 2 with the gaming machine frame 3 opened.

The display monitor 29 can display winning information such as consecutive ratios, role ratios, and bases. Consecutive ratio is the ratio of the number of prize balls in the big prize opening (attacker) to the total number of prize balls. The role ratio is the ratio of the total number of prize balls to the number of prize balls awarded to the second starting prize opening (electric chew) and the number of prize balls awarded to the large prize opening (attacker). The base is the ratio of the total number of prize balls to the number of game balls launched. The display monitor 29 can display the setting values in the pachinko game machine 1 when it is in the setting change state or the setting confirmation state. The display monitor 29 only needs to be able to display setting values to be changed or checked when in the setting change state or setting confirmation state.

The setting key 51 and the setting switch 52 cannot be operated from the front side of the pachinko game machine 1 when the game machine frame 3 is closed. A glass door frame 3a having a glass window is rotatably provided in the game machine frame 3, and the game area can be opened and closed by the glass door frame 3a. When the glass door frame 3a is closed, the game area can be seen through the glass window.

In the pachinko game machine 1, a security cover 500A is attached to the right end of the outer frame 1a formed in the shape of a vertically long square frame. When the gaming machine frame 3 is closed, the security cover 500A covers the right side of the substrate case 201 including the setting keys 51 and the setting changeover switches 52 from the rear side. The security cover 500A is a substantially L-shaped member including short pieces 500Aa and long pieces 500Ab, and may be made of transparent synthetic resin.

(Overview of Game Progress)
A game ball is shot toward a game area by a player's rotating operation of a ball-hitting operation handle 30 provided in the pachinko game machine 1 . When the game ball passes through the passage gate 41, the normal pattern display device 20 starts the normal pattern game. In addition, when the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 during the period during the execution of the previous normal game (when the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 but the normal game based on the passage cannot be executed immediately) , the normal game based on the passage is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4).

In this normal pattern game, if a specific normal pattern (normal pattern per pattern) is stopped and displayed, the display result of the normal pattern becomes "normal pattern per pattern". On the other hand, if a normal pattern (normal pattern losing pattern) other than the normal pattern per pattern is stop-displayed as the determined normal pattern, the display result of the normal pattern becomes "normal pattern losing". When it comes to "normal game", the variable winning ball device 6B is opened for a predetermined period of time and the opening control is performed (the second start winning opening is opened).

When a game ball enters the first starting winning hole formed in the winning ball device 6A, the first special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A is started.

When the game ball enters the second starting winning hole formed in the variable winning ball device 6B, the second special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B is started.

In addition, when the game ball enters (wins) the start winning opening during the period during which the special game is running, or during the period when it is controlled to the big win game state or the small win game state described later (although the start win has occurred If the special game based on the starting prize cannot be executed immediately), the execution of the special game based on the entry is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4).

In the special symbol game, if a specific special symbol (a big hit symbol, for example, "7", the actual symbol differs depending on the type of the big hit described below) is stopped and displayed as a fixed special symbol, it becomes a "big win" and a big winning symbol. If a predetermined special symbol (a small winning symbol, for example, "2") different from the symbol is stop-displayed, it becomes a "small winning". Also, if a special symbol (losing symbol, for example, "-") different from the big-hit symbol or the small-hit symbol is stop-displayed, it becomes "losing".

After the display result in the special game becomes "big win", the game is controlled to a big win game state as an advantageous state for the player. After the display result in the special game becomes "minor win", it is controlled to the small win game state.

In the jackpot game state, the jackpot formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined manner. The open state is defined by timing of elapse of a predetermined period (for example, 29.5 seconds or 1.8 seconds) and timing until the number of game balls entering the big winning opening reaches a predetermined number (for example, 10). It will continue until whichever comes first. The predetermined period is an upper limit period during which the big winning slot can be opened in one round, and is hereinafter also referred to as an upper limit opening period. One cycle in which the big winning opening is opened in this way is called a round (round game). In the jackpot game state, the round can be repeatedly executed until it reaches a predetermined upper limit number of times (15 times or 2 times).

In the jackpot game state, the player can get a prize ball by entering the game ball into the big winning hole. Therefore, the jackpot gaming state is an advantageous state for the player. The larger the number of rounds in the jackpot game state and the longer the upper limit period of opening, the more advantageous the player is. In the jackpot game state, so-called right-handed hitting is performed to shoot the game ball to the game area on the right side so as to enter the game ball into the big prize hole formed by the special variable ball game device 7 .

In addition, a jackpot type is set in the "jackpot". For example, multiple types of opening modes (number of rounds and upper limit period of opening) of the big winning opening and game states after the jackpot game state (normal state, time saving state, variable probability state, etc.) are prepared, and the jackpot type is set according to these It is As the jackpot types, there may be provided a jackpot type with which many prize balls can be obtained, a jackpot type with few prize balls, or a jackpot type with which few prize balls can be obtained.

In the small winning game state, the big winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined opening mode. For example, in the small winning game state, the same opening mode as the big winning game state when some jackpot types etc.), the big prize opening is opened. In addition, you may provide a small-hit classification also in a "small-hit" like a big-hit classification.

After the jackpot game state is finished, depending on the jackpot type, it may be controlled to a time-saving state or a variable probability state.

In the time saving state, the control (time saving control) that shortens the average special figure fluctuation time (period of varying the special figure) than the normal state is executed. In the time-saving state, by shortening the average normal figure fluctuation time (the period during which the normal figure is changed) than in the normal state, and by improving the probability of becoming a "normal figure hit" in the general figure game than in the normal state, etc. Control (high opening control, high base control) that makes it easier for game balls to enter the second start winning opening is also executed. Since the time-saving state is a state in which the variation efficiency of the special symbols (especially the second special symbols) is improved, it is an advantageous state for the player.

In the variable probability state (probability variable state), in addition to the time-saving control, the variable probability control in which the probability that the display result is a "jackpot" is higher than in the normal state is executed. The variable probability state is a state in which the variation efficiency of the special symbols is improved, and in addition, a "big hit" is likely to occur, so it is a further advantageous state for the player.

The time saving state and the variable probability state are continued until one of the end conditions such as execution of the special game for a predetermined number of times and start of the next big win game state is established first. The end condition that the special figure game of a predetermined number of times has been executed is also referred to as a number cut (number cut time reduction, number cut probability variable, etc.).

The normal state means a game state other than a special state such as an advantageous state such as a jackpot game state that is advantageous to the player, a time saving state, a variable probability state, etc., and the display result in the normal game is "normal game". The pachinko gaming machine 1, such as the probability and the probability that the display result in the special game will be a "jackpot", returns to the initial setting state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (for example, a predetermined return after power-on, such as when the system is reset) It is the state controlled in the same way as when processing is not executed).

The state in which probability variable control is executed is also called a high probability state, and the state in which probability variable control is not executed is also called a low probability state. A state in which time-saving control is performed is also referred to as a high-based state, and a state in which time-saving control is not performed is also referred to as a low-based state. Combining these, the short-time state is also called a low-probability-high base state, the probability-variable state is a high-probability-high base state, and the normal state is a low-probability-low base state. The high probability state and the low base state are also referred to as the high probability low base state.

After the small win game state is over, the game state is not changed, and the game state before the display result of the special figure game becomes "small win" is continuously controlled (however, "small win" occurs). If the special game at the time is the special game for the predetermined number of times in the above cut, the game state is naturally changed). In addition, there may not be a "small hit" as a display result of a special figure game.

In addition, the game state may change based on the fact that the game ball has passed through a specific area (for example, a specific area within the big winning opening) during the jackpot game state. For example, when the game ball passes through the specific area, it may be controlled to the probability variable state after the big hit game state.
(Progress of production, etc.)

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, various effects (effects such as notifying the progress of the game and exciting the game) are executed according to the progress of the game. The production will be described below. The effect is performed by displaying various effect images on the image display device 5. In addition to or instead of the display, sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R and the game effect lamp 9 are provided. lighting or extinguishing, the movement of the movable body 32, or a performance using any performance device including a part or all of these.

As an effect executed according to the progress of the game, in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, 5R provided on the image display device 5, the first special game or the second In response to the start of the 2 special figure game, the variable display of the decoration pattern is started. At the timing when the display result (also called fixed special pattern) is stopped and displayed in the first special game or the second special game, a fixed decorative pattern (combination of three decorative patterns), which is the display result of variable display of decorative patterns, is displayed. ) is also stopped (derived).

During the period from the start of the variable display of the decorative design to the end of the variable display, the variable display of the decorative design may be in a predetermined ready-to-win state (ready-to-win state is established). Here, the ready-to-win mode means that when the decorative symbols stopped and displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 constitute a part of the jackpot combination described later, the decorative symbols that are not stopped and displayed are displayed in a variable manner. It is the aspect that is continuing.

Further, a ready-to-win effect is executed in response to the above-described ready-to-win mode during the variable display of decorative symbols. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the ratio of the display result (the display result of the special game or the display result of the variable display of the decoration pattern) to the "big win" (also called the "big win reliability" or "big win expectation") depends on the performance mode. A plurality of different types of ready-to-win effects are executed. The ready-to-win performance includes, for example, a normal reach and a super-to-win with higher reliability than the normal reach.

When the display result of the special game is a "big hit", a fixed decorative pattern that is a predetermined big hit combination is derived as a display result of the variable display of decorative patterns on the screen of the image display device 5 (decoration The display result of the variable display of the pattern becomes a "jackpot"). As an example, the same decoration patterns (for example, "7" etc.) are stop-displayed together on predetermined effective lines in the "left", "middle" and "right" decoration pattern display areas 5L, 5C and 5R. .

In the case of a ``variable probability big hit'' controlled to a variable probability state after the end of the big win game state, odd decorative patterns (for example, "7" etc.) are stopped and displayed together, and the variable probability state is entered after the end of the big win game state. In the case of an uncontrolled "non-probability variable jackpot (normal jackpot)", even-numbered decorative symbols (for example, "6") may be stop-displayed together. In this case, the odd-numbered decorative design is also called the probability variable design, and the even-numbered decorative design is also called the non-probable variable design (normal design). After becoming a ready-to-win mode with non-probability variation symbols, a promotion performance may be executed to finally become a "probability variation big hit".

When the display result of the special game is a "small hit", the display result of the variable display of the decorative patterns on the screen of the image display device 5 is a fixed decorative pattern that becomes a predetermined small winning combination (for example, " 1, 3, 5", etc.) are derived (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern becomes a "minor hit"). As an example, decoration symbols constituting a chance eye are stopped and displayed on predetermined effective lines in the “left”, “middle” and “right” decoration symbol display areas 5L, 5C and 5R. In addition, when the display result of the special game is "big hit" of some jackpot types (jackpot type of jackpot game state in the same manner as the small win game state), and when it becomes "small hit" , a common fixed decoration pattern may be derived and displayed.

If the display result of the special game is "Loss", the variable display mode of the decorative pattern does not become the ready-to-win mode, and the fixed decorative pattern of the non-reach combination (" Also referred to as "non-reach loss".) may be stopped (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern becomes "non-reach loss"). In addition, when the display result is "losing", after the mode of variable display of the decorative pattern becomes the ready-to-win mode, the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is a predetermined ready-to-win combination ("reach losing") that is not a big hit combination. (Also called) fixed decorative pattern is displayed stop (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is "reach lost").

The effects that can be executed by the pachinko gaming machine 1 include displaying the variable display corresponding display (suspended display and active display). In addition, as other effects, for example, a notice effect for notifying the reliability of the big hit is executed during the variable display of the decorative symbols. The notice effect includes a notice effect for notifying the reliability of the big win in the variable display during execution and a pre-reading notice effect for notifying the reliability of the big win in the variable display before execution (variable display whose execution is suspended). As the pre-reading advance notice effect, an effect of changing the display mode of the display corresponding to variable display (suspended display or active display) to a mode different from normal may be executed.

Also, in the image display device 5, the decorative patterns are temporarily stopped during the variable display of the decorative patterns, and then the variable display is restarted, so that one variable display is simulated as a plurality of variable displays. A pseudo continuous effect may be executed.

Even during the big winning game state, the performance during the big winning is executed for informing the big winning game state. As the effect during the big win, the effect of notifying the number of rounds or the promotion effect indicating that the value of the big win game state is improved may be executed. In addition, even during the small winning game state, the effect during the small winning to report the small winning game state is executed. It should be noted that during the small winning game state, some of the jackpot types (jackpot types in the jackpot game state in the same manner as the small hit game state, for example, the jackpot type in the subsequent game state high probability state) jackpot game By executing a common performance in both states, the player may not know whether the current state is a small win game state or a big win game state. In such a case, by executing a common performance after the end of the small winning game state and after the end of the big winning game state, it is made impossible to distinguish whether the state is a high probability state or a low probability state. may

Further, for example, when a special game or the like is not being executed, a demonstration (demonstration) image is displayed on the image display device 5 (customer waiting demonstration effect is executed).

(Substrate configuration)
The pachinko game machine 1 is equipped with a main board 11, an effect control board 12, a sound control board 13, a lamp control board 14, a relay board 15, etc., as shown in FIG. In addition, various substrates such as a payout control substrate, an information terminal substrate, and a launch control substrate are arranged on the back surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1 . Furthermore, a power supply board 17 is also mounted. Various control boards are not only electronic circuit boards such as printed wiring boards on which conductive patterns are formed and on which electrical components can be mounted, but are also configured to implement specific electrical functions by mounting electrical components on electronic circuit boards. It is a concept that includes an electronic circuit mounting board that has been manufactured.

In the pachinko game machine 1, the power supply board 17 can supply power from an AC 100V external power supply such as a commercial power supply to electrical components including various control boards such as the main board 11 and the performance control board 12. The power supply board 17 includes, for example, a rectifier circuit for converting alternating current (AC) into direct current (DC), a power circuit for converting a predetermined DC voltage into a specific DC voltage (eg, 12 V DC or 5 V DC), and the like. I have.

The main board 11 is a control board on the main side, and the progress of the above-mentioned games in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (execution of a special game (including management of suspension), execution of a general-purpose game (including management of suspension), jackpot game state, small hit game state, game state, etc.) has a function to control. The main board 11 has a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110, a solenoid circuit 111, and the like.

The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101, a RAM (Random Access Memory) 102, and a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103. , a random number circuit 104 and an I/O (Input/Output port) 105 .

The CPU 103 executes a program stored in the ROM 101 to perform processing for controlling the progress of the game (processing for realizing the functions of the main substrate 11). At this time, various data stored in the ROM 101 (variation patterns described later, effect control commands described later, data such as various tables referred to when making various decisions described later) are used, and the RAM 102 is used as the main memory. . The RAM 102 is a backup RAM that retains stored contents for a predetermined period of time even if the power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is stopped in part or in its entirety. All or part of the program stored in the ROM 101 may be developed in the RAM 102 and executed on the RAM 102 .

The random number circuit 104 counts updatably numerical data representing various random numbers (game random numbers) used to control the progress of the game. The game random numbers may be updated (updated by software) when the CPU 103 executes a predetermined computer program.

The I/O 105 includes, for example, an input port to which various signals (detection signals to be described later) are input, various signals (first special symbol display device 4A, second special symbol display device 4B, normal symbol display device 20, first reservation It includes an output port for transmitting a signal for controlling (driving) the indicator 25A, the second hold indicator 25B, the normal figure hold indicator 25C, and a solenoid drive signal).

The switch circuit 110 receives detection signals from various switches (gate switch 21, starting switch (first starting switch 22A and second starting switch 22B), count switch 23) for detecting game balls A detection signal indicating that the switch has been turned on by entering) is captured and transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100. The transmission of the detection signal means that the passage or entry of the game ball has been detected.

The switch circuit 110 takes in a reset signal, a power-off signal, and a clear signal from the power board 17 and transmits them to the game control microcomputer 100 . The reset signal is an operation stop signal for stopping the operation of the control circuit such as the game control microcomputer 100, and can be output using either the power supply monitoring circuit, the IC with built-in watchdog timer, or the system reset IC. I wish I had. The power-off signal turns off when a predetermined power supply voltage used in the pachinko game machine 1 exceeds a predetermined value, and turns on when the period in which the predetermined power supply voltage is equal to or less than the predetermined value continues for a power-off reference time or longer. Become. The clear signal is turned on, for example, when a clear switch provided on the power supply substrate 17 is pressed.

Solenoid circuit 111, a solenoid drive signal from the game control microcomputer 100 (for example, a signal to turn on the solenoid 81 and the solenoid 82), to the solenoid 81 for normal electric accessories and the solenoid 82 for the big winning entrance door transmit.

A display monitor 29 , a display changeover switch 31 , a setting key 51 , a setting changeover switch 52 and a door open sensor 90 are connected to the main substrate 11 . The door open sensor 90 detects opening of the gaming machine frame 3 including the glass door frame 3a.

The main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100), as part of the control of the progress of the game, produces a production control command (a command to specify (notify) the progress of the game, etc.) according to the progress of the game. 12. The effect control command output from the main board 11 is relayed by the relay board 15 and supplied to the effect control board 12. - 特許庁The effect control command includes, for example, various determination results on the main board 11 (for example, the display result of the special game (including the jackpot type), the variation pattern used when executing the special game (details will be described later). )), game status (for example, start and end of variable display, opening status of big winning slots, occurrence of winning, number of reserved memories, game status), commands specifying error occurrence, and the like.

The effect control board 12 is a sub-side control board independent of the main board 11, receives the effect control command, and produces effects based on the received effect control command (various effects according to the progress of the game, (including various notifications such as driving of the movable body 32, error notification, power failure recovery notification, etc.).

The performance control board 12 is equipped with a performance control CPU 120, a ROM 121, a RAM 122, a display control section 123, a random number circuit 124, and an I/O 125.

The effect control CPU 120 executes a program stored in the ROM 121 to execute a process for executing the effect together with the display control unit 123 (a process for realizing the above functions of the effect control board 12, and the effect to be executed (including the decision, etc.). At this time, various data (data such as various tables) stored in the ROM 121 are used, and the RAM 122 is used as a main memory.

The effect control CPU 120 displays the execution of the effect based on the detection signal from the controller sensor unit 35A and the push sensor 35B (a signal that is output when an operation by the player is detected and appropriately indicates the operation content). The controller 123 may also be instructed.

The display control unit 123 includes a VDP (Video Display Processor), a CGROM (Character Generator ROM), a VRAM (Video RAM), etc., and executes an effect based on an effect execution instruction from the effect control CPU 120 .

The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to display a performance image by supplying a video signal corresponding to the performance to be executed to the image display device 5 based on the performance execution instruction from the performance control CPU 120 . The display control unit 123 further supplies a sound designation signal (a signal designating the sound to be output) to the sound control board 13 in order to output sound synchronized with the display of the effect image and to turn on/off the game effect lamp 9 . Also, it supplies a lamp signal (a signal specifying the lighting/extinguishing mode of the lamp) to the lamp control board 14 . Further, the display control unit 123 supplies a signal for operating the movable body 32 to the movable body 32 or a driving circuit for driving the movable body 32 .

The audio control board 13 is equipped with various circuits for driving the speakers 8L and 8R, drives the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound designation signal, and outputs the sound designated by the sound designation signal from the speakers 8L and 8R. Let

The lamp control board 14 is equipped with various circuits for driving the game effect lamp 9, drives the game effect lamp 9 based on the lamp signal, and turns on/off the game effect lamp 9 in a manner specified by the lamp signal. do. In this manner, the display control unit 123 controls sound output and lighting/extinguishing of the lamp.

Sound output, lamp lighting/extinguishing control (supply of sound designation signal and lamp signal, etc.), and control of movable body 32 (supply of signal for operating movable body 32, etc.) are executed by effect control CPU 120. You may do so.

The random number circuit 124 counts updatably numerical data indicating various random numbers (random numbers for effects) used for executing various effects. The effect random number may be updated by effect control CPU 120 executing a predetermined computer program (updated by software).

I / O 125 mounted on the production control board 12 has an input port for taking in production control commands transmitted from, for example, the main board 11, and various signals (video signal, sound designation signal, lamp signal). and an output port of

Boards other than the main board 11, such as the effect control board 12, the sound control board 13, and the lamp control board 14, are also called sub-boards. A plurality of sub-boards may be provided for each function as in the pachinko game machine 1, or one sub-board may be configured to have a plurality of functions.

(motion)
Next, the operation (action) of the pachinko game machine 1 will be described.

(Major operations of the main substrate 11)
First, main operations in the main board 11 will be described. When power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is activated, and the CPU 103 executes the game control main process. FIG. 4 is a flowchart showing game control main processing executed by the CPU 103 on the main substrate 11. As shown in FIG.

In the game control main process shown in FIG. 4, the CPU 103 first sets interrupt prohibition (step S1). Subsequently, necessary initial settings are performed (step S2). The initial settings include stack pointer setting, internal device (CTC (counter/timer circuit), parallel input/output port, etc.) register setting, and setting to make the RAM 102 accessible.

Next, it is determined whether or not the recovery condition is satisfied (step S3). The recovery condition can be satisfied when the clear signal is in the OFF state, there is backup data, and the backup RAM is normal. When the power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is started, for example, if a clear switch provided on the power supply board 17 is pressed, a clear signal in an ON state is input to the game control microcomputer 100 . If such an on-state clear signal is input, it may be determined in step S3 that the restoration condition is not satisfied. The backup data may be stored in the RAM 102 serving as a backup RAM for game control. In step S3, the presence or absence of backup data, the presence or absence of data errors, etc. may be confirmed or inspected to determine whether or not the recovery condition can be established.

If the restoration condition is satisfied (step S3; Yes), after executing the restoration process (step S4), the setting confirmation process (step S5) is executed. The work area is set based on the contents stored in the RAM 102 by the recovery process in step S4. By setting the work area using the backup data stored in the RAM 102, the game state when the power supply is stopped can be restored. It is sufficient if it is possible to restart the fluctuation of the design.

If the recovery condition is not satisfied (step S3; No), after executing the initialization process (step S6), the setting change process (step S7) is executed. The initialization processing in step S6 includes clear processing for clearing the flags, counters, and buffers stored in the RAM 102, and initial values are set in the work area by executing the clear processing.

In the setting confirmation process of step S5, it is determined whether or not a predetermined setting confirmation condition is satisfied. The setting confirmation condition is established, for example, when the detection signal from the door opening sensor 90 is ON and the setting key 51 is ON when the power supply is started. The setting confirmation process of step S5 is executed when the recovery condition including the clear signal being in the OFF state is satisfied in step S3. Therefore, since the setting confirmation condition can be satisfied only when the clear signal is in the OFF state, the fact that the clear signal is in the OFF state can also be included in the setting confirmation condition.

When the setting confirmation condition is satisfied in the setting confirmation process of step S5, the setting confirmation state is entered in which the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 can be confirmed, and the main board 11 sets the performance control board 12. A confirmation start command is sent. In the setting confirmation state, the setting values set in the pachinko game machine 1 can be confirmed by the display on the display monitor 29 . When ending the setting confirmation state, a setting confirmation end command is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 .

When the pachinko game machine 1 is in the setting confirmation state, the pachinko game machine 1 may be in a game stop state to stop the progress of the game. When the game is in the stopped state, shooting of game balls by operating the batted ball operation handle, detection of game balls by various switches, etc. are stopped, and the first special symbol display device 4A, the second special symbol display device 4B, and the normal symbols are stopped. The display device 20 may be controlled so as to stop-display a lost symbol or the like, or to perform a display corresponding to a game stop state different from the lost symbol. When the setting confirmation state ends, the game stop state associated therewith should also end.

In the setting change process of step S7, it is determined whether or not a predetermined setting change condition is satisfied. The setting change condition is satisfied, for example, when the detection signal from the door opening sensor 90 is in the ON state and the setting key 51 is turned ON when power supply is started. The setting change condition may include that the clear signal is on.

When the setting change condition is satisfied in the setting change process of step S7, the setting change state is set in which the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 can be changed, and the main board 11 sets to the effect control board 12. A change start command is sent. In the setting change state, the setting values are displayed on the display monitor 29, and each time the operation of the setting changeover switch 52 is detected, the numerical values displayed on the display monitor 29 are sequentially updated and displayed. After that, when the setting key 51 is turned off by an operation by a game hall staff member or the like, the setting value displayed on the display monitor 29 is stored (updated) in the backup area of the RAM 102, and the display monitor 29 is updated. turn off the When ending the setting change state, a setting change end command is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 .

When the pachinko game machine 1 is in the setting change state, the pachinko game machine 1 may be put in the game stop state as in the setting confirmation state. When the setting change state ends, the game stop state associated therewith should also end.

On the effect control board 12 side, when a setting confirmation start command or a setting change start command is received, control may be performed to notify that the setting is being checked or that the setting is being changed. For example, a predetermined image may be displayed on the image display device 5, a predetermined sound may be output from the speakers 8L and 8R, or a light-emitting member such as the game effect lamp 9 may emit light in a predetermined manner.

The clear signal is turned on by pressing a clear switch provided on the power supply board 17, for example. Therefore, if the detection signal from the door opening sensor 90 is ON and the setting key 51 is ON when the power supply is started, and if the clear switch is ON, the initialization process of step S6 and the step The setting change process of S7 is executed to enable control to the setting change state, and if the clear switch is off, the setting confirmation process of step S5 is executed together with the recovery process of step S4 to enable control to the setting confirmation state. If the detection signal from the door opening sensor 90 is off when the power supply is started, or if the setting key 51 is off, and if the clear switch is on, the initialization process of step S6 is executed. On the other hand, it is not controlled to the setting change state, and if the clear switch is off, the recovery processing of step S4 is executed, but it is not controlled to the setting confirmation state.

After executing the setting confirmation process or the setting change process, the CPU 103 executes a random number circuit setting process for initializing the random number circuit 104 (step S8). Then, the register of the CTC built in the game control microcomputer 100 is set so that the timer interrupt is periodically applied every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms) (step S9), and the interrupt is permitted (step S10 ). After that, loop processing is entered. Thereafter, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 at predetermined time intervals (for example, 2 ms), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute timer interrupt processing.

When the CPU 103 that has executed such game control main processing receives an interrupt request signal from the CTC and accepts the interrupt request, it executes the game control timer interrupt processing shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the game control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. It is determined whether or not detection signals have been received from various switches such as the switch 22B and the count switch 23 (step S21). Subsequently, by executing predetermined main-side error processing, an abnormality diagnosis of the pachinko game machine 1 is performed, and a warning can be generated if necessary according to the diagnosis result (step S22). After that, by executing a predetermined information output process, for example, jackpot information (information indicating the number of occurrences of jackpots, etc.), start information (start Data such as information indicating the number of wins, etc.), probability change information (information indicating the number of times the odd state has occurred, etc.) is output (step S23).

Following the information output process, a game random number update process for updating at least part of the game random numbers used on the main board 11 side by software is executed (step S24). After that, the CPU 103 executes a special symbol process (step S25). By the CPU 103 executing the special symbol process processing for each timer interrupt, execution and suspension management of the special symbol game, control of the big win game state and small win game state, control of the game state, and the like are realized.

Following the special symbol process, the normal symbol process is executed (step S26). The CPU 103 executes normal symbol process processing for each timer interrupt, thereby managing the execution and suspension of the normal symbol game based on the detection signal from the gate switch 21 (based on the game ball passing through the passage gate 41), It is possible to control the opening of the variable winning ball device 6B based on the "normal game hit". The execution of the normal pattern game is performed by driving the normal pattern display device 20, and the normal pattern reservation number is displayed by lighting the normal pattern reservation display device 25C.

After executing the normal symbol process processing, as part of the game control timer interrupt processing, processing when power failure occurs, processing for paying out prize balls, and the like may be performed. After that, the CPU 103 executes command control processing (step S27). The CPU 103 may transmit and set an effect control command in each of the processes described above. In the command control process of step S27, a process of transmitting the effect control command set for transmission to the sub-side control board such as the effect control board 12 is performed. After executing the command control process, after permitting the interrupt, the game control timer interrupt process is terminated.

FIG. 6 is a flow chart showing an example of the process executed in step S25 shown in FIG. 5 as the special symbol process process. In this special symbol process process, the CPU 103 first executes a starting winning determination process (step S101).

In the starting winning determination process, the occurrence of starting winning is detected, and the process of storing the pending information in a predetermined area of the RAM 102 and updating the pending storage number is executed. When a starting prize is generated, a random number value for determining the display result (including the jackpot type) and the variation pattern is extracted and stored as pending information. Further, based on the extracted random number value, a process of pre-reading and judging the display result and the variation pattern may be executed. After storing the pending information and the number of pending memories, the transmission setting for transmitting the effect control command for specifying the determination result such as the occurrence of the start winning, the number of pending memories, and the prefetch determination is performed on the effect control board 12. will be The effect control command at the time of starting winning thus set to be transmitted is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by, for example, executing the command control process of step S27 shown in FIG. is transmitted to

After executing the starting prize determination process in step S101, the CPU 103 selects and executes one of the processes of steps S110 to S120 according to the value of the special figure process flag provided in the RAM102. In addition, in each process (steps S110 to S120) of the special symbol process process, transmission setting for transmitting the effect control command corresponding to each process to the effect control board 12 is performed.

The special symbol normal process of step S110 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "0" (initial value). In this special symbol normal process, it is determined whether or not to start the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game based on the presence or absence of pending information. In addition, in the special symbol normal processing, based on the random number value for determining the display result, whether or not the display result of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is a "big hit" or "small hit", and the type of the big hit in the case of "big hit". is determined (predetermined) before the display result is derived and displayed. Furthermore, in the special symbol normal process, a fixed special symbol (any one of a big hit symbol, a small winning symbol, or a losing symbol) to be stopped and displayed in the special symbol game is set according to the determined display result. After that, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "1", and the special symbol normal process ends. In addition, the special figure game using the second special figure may be executed with priority over the special figure game using the first special figure (also called special figure 2 priority digestion). Also, the winning order of the game balls to the first start winning opening and the second starting winning opening may be stored, and the start condition of the special game may be established in the order of winning (also called winning order).

When making various decisions based on random numbers, various tables stored in the ROM 101 (tables in which decision values to be compared with random numbers are assigned to decision results) are referred to. Other decisions on the main board 11 and various decisions on the effect control board 12 are the same. Various tables are stored in the ROM 121 of the effect control board 12 .

The variation pattern setting process of step S111 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "1". In this variation pattern setting process, one of a plurality of variation patterns is selected using random numbers for determining the variation pattern based on the result of pre-determination as to whether the display result is a "big hit" or a "small hit." including the process of determining In the variation pattern setting process, when the variation pattern is determined, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "2", and the variation pattern setting process ends.

The variation pattern is the execution time of the special game (special figure fluctuation time) (also the execution time of the variable display of the decorative pattern), the form of variable display of the decorative pattern (whether or not there is reach, etc.), and the variable display of the decorative pattern It specifies the content of the production (type of reach production, etc.), and is also called a variable display pattern.

The special symbol variation process of step S112 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "2". This special symbol variation processing includes a process of setting for varying the special symbols in the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and the elapsed time after the special symbol starts to vary. It includes processing to measure Also, it is determined whether or not the measured elapsed time has reached the special figure variation time corresponding to the variation pattern. Then, when the elapsed time from the start of the special symbol variation reaches the special symbol variation time, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "3", and the special symbol variation processing ends.

The special symbol stop processing of step S113 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "3". In this special symbol stop processing, the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B stop the variation of the special symbol, and stop display (derivate) the fixed special symbol which is the display result of the special symbol. It includes a process to set for Then, when the display result is "big hit", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "4". On the other hand, when the big hit flag is off and the display result is "small hit", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "8". Moreover, when the display result is "losing", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0". When the display result is "small hit" or "losing", when the time saving state or probability variable state is controlled, and when the end of the number cut is established, the game state is also updated. When the value of the special figure process flag is updated, the special symbol stop processing ends.

The jackpot opening preprocessing of step S114 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "4". This jackpot opening pre-processing includes processing for making settings for starting the execution of the round in the jackpot game state and opening the jackpot, based on the fact that the display result is "jackpot". is When opening the big winning opening, a process of supplying a solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the big winning opening door is executed. At this time, for example, an upper limit period for opening the big winning opening and an upper limit number of rounds to be executed are set according to the type of the jackpot. When these settings are finished, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5", and the big hit opening pretreatment is finished.

The process during jackpot opening of step S115 is performed when the value of a special figure process flag is "5". In this process during the opening of the big win, there is a process of measuring the elapsed time from opening the big winning hole, and based on the measured elapsed time and the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23, the big winning hole is counted. It includes processing for determining whether or not it is time to return from the open state to the closed state. Then, when returning the large winning opening to the closed state, after executing processing such as stopping the supply of the solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the large winning opening door, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "6", The process during jackpot opening is terminated.

The jackpot opening post-processing of step S116 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "6". This jackpot opening post-processing includes processing for determining whether or not the number of executions of rounds in which the jackpot is opened has reached a set upper limit number of executions, and processing for judging whether or not the number of executions of rounds in which the jackpot is opened has reached a set upper limit number of executions. It includes processing to make settings for terminating . Then, when the number of executions of the round has not reached the upper limit number of executions, the value of the special process flag is updated to "5", while when the number of executions of the round reaches the upper limit number of executions, the special process flag The value is updated to "7". When the value of the special figure process flag is updated, the jackpot release post-processing ends.

The jackpot end processing of step S117 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "7". This jackpot end processing includes a process of waiting until the waiting time corresponding to the period in which the ending production as a production operation for informing the end of the jackpot game state has passed, and a probability change corresponding to the end of the jackpot game state. It includes processing for performing various settings for starting control and time saving control. When such setting is performed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the jackpot end processing is terminated.

Small hit opening pretreatment of step S118 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "8". This small hit opening pre-processing includes a process of setting to open the big winning opening in the small win game state based on the display result being "small win". At this time, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "9", and the small hit opening preprocessing ends.

Small hit during opening processing of step S119 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "9". In this process during opening of the small prize, there is a process of measuring the elapsed time from opening the big winning opening, and the timing of returning the big winning opening from the open state to the closed state based on the measured elapsed time. It includes processing for determining whether or not When the big winning opening is returned to the closed state and the end timing of the small winning game state comes, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "10", and the small winning open processing is ended.

Small hit end processing of step S120 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "10". This small-hit end processing includes a process of waiting until the waiting time corresponding to the period during which the effect operation for informing the end of the small-hit game state is executed elapses. Here, when the small winning game state ends, the game state in the pachinko game machine 1 before entering the small winning game state is continued. When the waiting time at the end of the small winning game state has passed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the small winning end processing ends.

The pachinko game machine 1 is configured such that the probability of winning a jackpot and the rate of winning balls are changed according to the set value. For example, in the special symbol normal processing of the special symbol process processing, by using the display result determination table (winning probability) according to the set value, the probability of winning a big hit and the rate of winning balls are changed. For example, the setting value consists of 6 stages from 1 to 6, and 6 is the highest probability of winning the big win, and the probability of winning the big win decreases in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, 1 as the value decreases. In this example, when 6 is set as the setting value, the advantage for the player is the highest, and the lower the value in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, 1, the lower the advantage in stages. . If the winning probability of the big win changes according to the set value, the ball payout rate may also change according to the set value. While the winning probability of the big win is constant regardless of the set value, the number of rounds in the big win game state may change according to the set value. The pachinko game machine 1 may be configured so as to be able to set one of a plurality of set values with different degrees of advantage for the player. The set values set in the pachinko game machine 1 are notified by transmitting a set value designation command from the main board 11 side to the effect control board 12 side.

FIG. 7 shows a configuration example of a display result determination table. FIG. 7(A) shows a configuration example of the first special figure display result determination table used when the fluctuation special figure is the first special figure, and FIG. It shows a configuration example of the display result determination table for the second special figure used when it is a figure. A display result determination table is a collection of data stored in the ROM 101 . In the display result determination table, the hit determination value compared with the random number MR1 is assigned to the special symbol display result, which is the variable display result of the special symbols, according to the set value. The random number MR1 is a random number for determining the display result, and the value is randomly updated within the range of 0-65535. As the display result determination table, a common display result determination table may be used for the first special figure and the second special figure.

In the display result determination table, when the gaming state is a probability variable state (high probability state), more judgment values than when it is a normal state or a time saving state (low probability state), "big hit" special figure display assigned to the result. Thereby, when it is a high probability state such as a probability variable state in which probability variable control is performed in the pachinko game machine 1, the probability that it is determined to control to a big hit game state is higher than when it is a low probability state such as a normal state or a time saving state. get higher

In the first special figure display result determination table, regardless of the game state or setting value, it is determined so that the probability that the special figure display result will be "small hit" and controlled to the small win game state will be the same value. has been assigned a value. In the second special figure display result determination table, regardless of the game state or setting value, the probability that the special figure display result is controlled to the small hit game state as "small hit" is the first special figure display result Determination values are assigned so as to be the same values different from those in the determination table. In addition, depending on the set value, the probability that the special figure display result is controlled to the small hit game state as the "small hit" may be changed. The probability that the special figure display result is controlled to the small winning game state as "small hit" regardless of the variation special figure may be the same probability.

In the display result determination table for the first special figure and the display result determination table for the second special figure, when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range from 1020 to 1237 of the hit judgment value is set regardless of the set value It is set to the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value for judging the jackpot. When the set value is 1, 1020 to 1237 are assigned to the "jackpot", and only the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value for judging the jackpot is set, while the set value 2 to set value 6 are set. In this case, a numerical range corresponding to each set value from 1238 is set as a non-common numerical range of the big hit determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the big hit determination value.

In the display result determination table for the first special figure and the display result determination table for the second special figure, when the game state is the variable probability state, the range from 1020 to 1346 of the hit determination values is a big hit regardless of the set value. It is set to the common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value for judging. When the set value is 1, by assigning 1020 to 1346 to the "jackpot", only the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value for judging the jackpot is set, while the set value 2 to the set value In the case of 6, a numerical range corresponding to each set value from 1346 is set as the non-common numerical range of the big hit determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the big hit determination value.

In the first special figure display result determination table, when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range from 32767 to 33094 of the hit determination values is a small value for determining a small hit regardless of the set value. It is set in the common numerical range of the hit judgment value. The small hit determination value is set to a numerical range different from the common numerical range and non-common numerical range of the big hit determination value, regardless of whether the set value is 1-6. This prevents the numerical range of the small-hit determination value from overlapping the range of the big-hit determination value that varies according to each set value.

In the first special figure display result determination table, when the gaming state is a variable probability state, the range from 32767 to 33094 in the hit determination value is the set value Regardless, it is set to a common numerical range of the small hit determination value for judging the small hit. The small hit determination value is set to a numerical range different from the common numerical range and non-common numerical range of the big hit determination value, regardless of whether the set value is 1-6. This prevents the numerical range of the small-hit determination value from overlapping the range of the big-hit determination value that varies according to each set value.

In the second special figure display result determination table, when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range from 32767 to 33421 of the hit determination values is a small value for determining a small hit regardless of the set value. It is set in the common numerical range of the hit judgment value. The small hit determination value is set to a numerical range different from the common numerical range and non-common numerical range of the big hit determination value, regardless of whether the set value is 1-6. This prevents the numerical range of the small-hit determination value from overlapping the range of the big-hit determination value that varies according to each set value.

In the second special figure display result determination table, when the gaming state is a variable probability state, the range from 32767 to 33421 of the hit determination value is the set value Regardless, it is set to a common numerical range of the small hit determination value for judging the small hit. The small-hit determination value is set to a numerical range different from the common numerical range and non-common numerical range of the big-hit determination value, regardless of whether the set value is 1-6. This prevents the numerical range of the small-hit determination value from overlapping with the range of the big-hit determination value that varies according to each set value.

The set values that can be set in the pachinko game machine 1 may be 5 or less or 7 or more. The smaller the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1, the more advantageous it is for the player. The playability may be changed according to the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1. - 特許庁For example, when the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 1, the jackpot probability in the normal state is 1/320, and the probability variable state loops at a rate of 65% (so-called variable loop type). When the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 2, the jackpot probability in the normal state is 1/200, and the game ball during the jackpot game is a predetermined value provided inside the special variable winning ball device 7. While controlling the game state after the end of the jackpot game to a probability variable state based on passing through the switch, the game property (so-called V variable probability type), and when the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 3, the probability of a big hit is 1/320 and the probability of a small hit is 1/50, and the game is played during a high base (during time reduction control). A game property (a so-called one-type two-type mixed type) that controls a big hit game state based on the passage of a ball through a predetermined switch provided inside the special variable winning ball device 7 may be employed. When the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is any one of 1 to 3, the game performance is the same, but the big win probability and small win probability are higher than when these set values are any one of 1 to 3. A setting may be provided in which the probability is high and the number of prize balls that can be obtained during the jackpot game is small (for example, the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is any one of 4 to 6). A common switch may be used for different purposes when game characteristics are changed according to a set value. Specifically, when the set value is 1 to 3, a predetermined switch provided in the special variable winning ball device 7 is set to a production switch (for executing a predetermined production each time a game ball passes through a prescribed area). switch), and when the set value is 4 to 6, the predetermined switch is a game switch (for controlling the game state to a variable probability state or a big hit game state based on the game ball passing through the predetermined switch switch).

The jackpot type may be determined at different ratios depending on the set value based on the assignment of the determination value in the jackpot type determination table. Alternatively, the jackpot type may be determined at a common rate regardless of the set value. The variation pattern may be determined at different ratios according to the set values based on the allocation of the determination values in the variation pattern determination table. Alternatively, the variation pattern may be determined with a common ratio regardless of the set value. A set value may be suggested by the frequency with which normal reach and super reach are performed by having the execution ratio of normal reach and super reach differ according to a set value. Alternatively, regardless of the setting value, the execution ratio of normal reach and super reach may be common. In addition, it may be possible to execute arbitrary setting suggestion effects at different ratios according to the set values.

(Major operations of production control board 12)
Next, main operations in the effect control board 12 will be described. In the effect control board 12, when the power supply voltage is supplied from the power supply board or the like, the effect control CPU 120 is activated, and the effect control main processing as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 8 is executed. When the production control main processing shown in FIG. Perform register setting of the mounted CTC (counter/timer circuit). Also, an initial operation control process is executed (step S72). In the initial motion control process, control for initial motion of the movable body 32, such as control for driving the movable body 32 to return it to the initial position and control for confirming a predetermined motion, is executed.

After that, it is determined whether or not the timer interrupt flag is turned on (step S73). The timer interrupt flag is set to ON every time a predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds) elapses based on, for example, the CTC register setting. At this time, if the timer interrupt flag is off (step S73; No), the process of step S73 is repeated and waits.

Also, on the side of the effect control board 12, an interrupt for receiving the effect control command from the main board 11 is generated in addition to the timer interrupt that occurs each time a predetermined time elapses. This interrupt is an interrupt generated when, for example, the effect control INT signal from the main substrate 11 is turned on. When an interrupt occurs due to the effect control INT signal being turned on, the effect control CPU 120 automatically sets interrupt prohibition, but when using a CPU that does not automatically enter an interrupt prohibition state, interrupt It is desirable to issue a prohibition instruction (DI instruction). The effect control CPU 120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process in response to the interruption caused by the effect control INT signal being turned on. In this command reception interrupt process, the effect control command is taken in from a predetermined input port for receiving the control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15 among the input ports included in the I/O 125 . The effect control command taken in at this time is stored in the effect control command reception buffer provided in the RAM 122, for example. After that, the effect control CPU 120 ends the command reception interrupt process after setting the interrupt permission.

If the timer interrupt flag is ON at step S73 (step S73; Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared to be turned off (step S74), and command analysis processing is executed (step S75). In the command analysis process, for example, after reading various effect control commands that are transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 and stored in the effect control command reception buffer, the read effect control command Corresponding settings and controls are performed. For example, the read production control command is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122, or the read production control command is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 so that the content specified by the production control command can be confirmed by the production control process processing or the like. It turns on the provided reception flag. Further, when the effect control command specifies the game state, the display control unit 123 may be instructed to display a background corresponding to the game state.

After executing the command analysis process in step S75, the effect control process process is executed (step S76). In the effect control process processing, for example, the display operation of the effect image in the display area of the image display device 5, the sound output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R, the lighting operation of the decorative light emitters such as the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LED, and the movable body 32 Control to operate various production devices such as driving operation of is performed. Further, determination, determination, setting, and the like are performed according to the effect control command and the like transmitted from the main substrate 11 regarding the control contents of the effect operation using various effect devices.

Random number update processing for production|presentation is performed following the production|presentation control process process of step S76 (step S77), and at least one part of the random number for production|presentation used by the production|presentation control board 12 side is updated by software. After that, the process returns to step S73. Other processing may be performed before returning to the processing of step S73.

FIG. 9 is a flow chart showing an example of processing executed in step S76 of FIG. 8 as the effect control process processing. In the effect control process shown in FIG. 9, the effect control CPU 120 first executes a pre-reading notice setting process (step S161). In the pre-reading notice setting process, for example, based on the effect control command at the time of start winning transmitted from the main substrate 11, determination, determination, setting, etc. for executing the pre-reading notice effect are performed. Also, a process for displaying a pending display is executed based on the number of pending memories specified from the effect control command.

After executing the process of step S161, the effect control CPU 120 selects and executes one of the processes of steps S170 to S177 as described below according to the value of the effect process flag provided in the RAM 122, for example.

The variable display start waiting process in step S170 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "0" (initial value). This variable display start waiting process is a process of determining whether or not to start variable display of decorative patterns on the image display device 5 based on whether or not a command designating the start of variable display has been received from the main substrate 11. and so on. When it is determined to start the variable display of the decoration pattern on the image display device 5, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "1", and the variable display start waiting process is terminated.

The variable display start setting process in step S171 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "1". In this variable display start setting process, based on the display result and the variation pattern specified by the effect control command, the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern (determined decorative pattern), the form of the variable display of the decorative pattern, the ready-to-win effect, and various other Whether or not to execute various effects such as advance notice effects, its mode, execution start timing, etc. are determined. Then, an effect control pattern (collection of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute the effect) reflecting the determination result or the like is set. After that, based on the set effect control pattern, the display control unit 123 is instructed to start execution of variable display of decorative symbols, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "2", and the variable display start setting process is terminated. The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to start variable display of the decorative design in response to an instruction to start execution of variable display of the decorative design.

The effect process during variable display in step S172 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "2". In this variable display effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 instructs the display control unit 123 to display the effect image based on the effect control pattern set in step S171 on the display screen of the image display device 5. , driving the movable body 32, outputting voices and sound effects from the speakers 8L and 8R by outputting commands (sound effect signals) to the voice control board 13, and outputting commands (illumination signals) to the lamp control board 14. Various effects are controlled during the variable display of decorative patterns, such as turning on/off/blinking the game effect lamp 9 and decorative LEDs by output. After performing such effect control, for example, an end code indicating the end of the variable display of the decorative pattern is read from the effect control pattern, or a command designating to stop display of the fixed decorative pattern is received from the main board 11. Corresponding to the fact that the player has done so, the fixed decoration pattern which becomes the display result of the decoration pattern is stopped and displayed. When the fixed decoration pattern is stopped and displayed, the value of the production process flag is updated to "3", and the production processing during variable display ends.

The special figure per waiting process of step S173 is a process executed when the value of the production process flag is "3". In this special figure per waiting process, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not an effect control command designating the start of the big hit game state or the small hit game state is received from the main substrate 11 . Then, when receiving the production control command designating the start of the jackpot game state or the small hit game state, if the command designates the start of the jackpot game state, the value of the production process flag is set to "6". ”. On the other hand, if the command designates the start of the small-hit game state, the value of the production process flag is updated to "4", which is the value corresponding to the small-hit production process. Further, when the waiting time for receiving the command elapses without receiving the command specifying the start of the big win game state or the small win game state, it is determined that the display result in the special figure game is "losing". Then, the value of the production process flag is updated to "0" which is the initial value. When the value of the production process flag is updated, the special figure per waiting process is terminated.

The production process during a small hit in step S174 is a process executed when the value of the production process flag is "4". In this small-hit mid-performance process, the performance control CPU 120 sets, for example, a performance control pattern corresponding to the performance content in the small-hit game state, and executes various performance controls in the small-hit game state based on the set content. . Further, in the small-hit middle production process, for example, in response to receiving a command designating to end the small-hit game state from the main board 11, the value of the production process flag is set to a value corresponding to the small-hit end production. It is updated to a certain "5", and the effect processing during the small hit is ended.

The small hit end production process of step S175 is a process executed when the value of the production process flag is "5". In this small hit end effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern corresponding to the end of the small win game state, etc., and various effect control at the end of the small win game state based on the setting content. to run. Thereafter, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value of "0", and the small winning end effect process is terminated.

The effect process during the big hit in step S176 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "6". In this big-hit production process, the production control CPU 120 sets, for example, production control patterns corresponding to the production contents in the big-hit game state, and executes various production controls in the big-hit game state based on the set contents. Further, in the jackpot middle effect process, for example, in response to receiving a command designating to end the big win game state from the main board 11, the value of the effect process flag is set to "7" which is a value corresponding to the ending effect process. ”, and ends the effect processing during the big hit.

The ending effect process of step S177 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "7". In this ending effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern corresponding to the end of the big win game state, etc., and controls various effects of the ending effect at the end of the big win game state based on the setting contents. Execute. After that, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value of "0", and the ending effect process is terminated.

(Modified example of basic explanation)
The present invention is not limited to the pachinko game machine 1 described in the basic description above, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the gist of the present invention.

The pachinko game machine 1 described in the basic description above is a payout type game machine that pays out a predetermined number of game media as a prize based on the occurrence of a prize, but instead, the game media are enclosed and points are given based on the occurrence of a prize. It may be an enclosed game machine.

Only one type of pattern (for example, a symbol indicating "-") may be displayed during the variable display of the special pattern, and the variable display may be performed by repeating the display and extinguishing of the relevant pattern. Further, even if the symbol is displayed during the variable display, the symbol may not be displayed when the variable display is stopped (the symbol indicating "-" may not be displayed as a display result).

In the above basic explanation, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is shown as the gaming machine, but medals are inserted to set a predetermined number of bets. A slot machine capable of executing a game (for example, a big bonus , regular bonus, RT, AT, ART, and CZ (hereinafter referred to as a slot machine equipped with one or more bonuses, etc.).

The program and data for realizing the present invention are not limited to the form of being distributed/provided on a detachable recording medium to the computer device or the like included in the pachinko game machine 1. It may be distributed by being installed in a storage device possessed by the software. Furthermore, the program and data for realizing the present invention can be distributed by being downloaded from another device on the network connected via a communication line or the like by providing a communication processing unit. I don't mind.

The game can be executed not only by inserting a detachable recording medium, but also by temporarily storing programs and data downloaded via a communication line or the like in an internal memory or the like. Alternatively, it may be directly executed using hardware resources of other devices on a network connected via a communication line or the like. Furthermore, the game may be executed by exchanging data with another computer device or the like via a network.

In this specification, expressions for comparing various ratios such as the execution ratio of effects (expressions such as “high”, “low”, “different”) indicate that one is a ratio of “0%”. may contain. For example, it includes a ratio of "0%" for one and a ratio of "100%" or less than "100%" for the other.

(Description on Characteristic Portion 042AK)
Next, the game machine in the characterizing part 042AK of this embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 10-1 to 10-21. The pachinko gaming machine 1 in the characteristic part 042AK of the present embodiment starts displaying the number of winning balls after a predetermined period of time when the attacker becomes open in the first round game, and the attacker wins within the predetermined period. If not, a predetermined display indicating that the number of winning balls is not increased is performed, and if the attacker wins within the predetermined period, a specific display different from the predetermined display is performed. Hereinafter, the pachinko game machine 1 in the characteristic portion 042AK having such characteristics will be described. Note that the description of the same parts as those described in the basic description above will be omitted.

FIG. 10-1 is a front view of the pachinko game machine 1, and includes a main lamp 9a, frame lamps 9b (lower left lamp 9bL1, upper left lamp 9bL2, lower right lamp 9bR1, upper right lamp 9bR2), attacker lamp 9c, movable body lamp 9d. , speaker lamps 9eL and 9eR, the lower display lamp 9f (the lower left lamp 9fL and the lower right display lamp 9fR), and the general winning gate vicinity lamp 9g are all turned on. It is a diagram. In the characteristic portion 042AK of the present embodiment, which will be described later in detail, the main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b (lower left lamp 9bL1, upper left lamp 9bL2, lower right lamp 9bR1, upper right lamp 9bR2), attacker lamp 9c, movable body lamp 9d. , speaker lamps 9eL, 9eR, lower display lamp 9f (lower left display lamp 9fL, right lower display lamp 9fR), and general winning gate vicinity lamp 9g are sequentially lit from lower left to lower right. It is possible to suggest to the player that he/she should hit to the right by letting the player do so.

FIG. 10-2 is a flow chart showing an example of the process executed in step S113 of FIG. 6 as the special symbol stop process. In the special symbol stop process shown in FIG. 10-2, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the big hit flag is ON (step 042AKS001). At this time, if the jackpot flag is ON (step 042AKS001; Yes), a waiting time for the effect at the start of jackpot is set (step 042AKS002). For example, in the process of step 042AKS002, a predetermined timer initial value corresponding to the waiting time for the effect at the start of the big win may be set in the game control process timer provided in the RAM102.

Following the processing of step 042AKS002, settings are made for transmitting a winning start designation command from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 (step 042AKS003). For example, in the processing of step 042AKS003, the setting data indicating the storage address in the ROM 101 of the winning start designation command table prepared in advance for transmitting the winning start designation command is stored in the buffer area designated by the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer. should be stored in After that, the jackpot flag is cleared to be turned off (step 042AKS004). In addition, the setting for ending the variable probability state and the time saving state is performed (step 042AKS005). For example, in step 042AKS005, the process of clearing the probability variation flag and the time saving flag to turn it off, and the processing of clearing the special figure variation counter for counting the number of times the special figure game is executed in the probability variation state and the time saving state It should be executed. Then, after updating the value of the special symbol process flag to "4" corresponding to the large winning opening pre-opening process (step 042AKS006), the special symbol stop process is terminated.

When the big hit flag is off at step 042AKS001 (step 042AKS001; No), it is determined whether or not the small hit flag is on (step 042AKS007). At this time, if the small hit flag is ON (step 042AKS007; No), the effect waiting time at the start of the small hit is set (step 042AKS008). For example, in the process of step 042AKS008, a predetermined timer initial value corresponding to the effect waiting time at the start of a small hit may be set in the game control process timer.

Following the processing of step 042AKS008, similarly to the processing of step 042AKS003, settings are made for transmitting the winning start designation command from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 (step 042AKS009). After that, the small hit flag is cleared to be turned off (step 042AKS010). Then, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "8" which is a value corresponding to the small hit opening preprocessing (step 042AKS011).

Also, when the small hit flag is off at step 042AKS007 (step 042AKS007; No), the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0" which is the value corresponding to the special symbol normal processing (step 042AKS012). . After executing either of the processes of step 042AKS011 and step 042AKS012, it is determined whether or not to terminate the variable probability state or the time saving state (step 042AKS013). For example, in the process of step 042AKS003, the value of the special figure fluctuation number counter (special figure fluctuation number count value) is updated by, for example, subtracting 1 or adding 1, and the special figure fluctuation number count value after the update is predetermined. It is determined whether or not it matches the special game state end determination value. At this time, if it matches the special game state end determination value, by clearing the variable probability flag and the time saving flag to turn it off, the variable probability state and the time saving state may be ended and controlled to the normal state. On the other hand, if it does not match the special game state end determination value, the state of the variable probability flag and the time saving flag may be maintained and the processing of step 042AKS013 may be terminated. After performing end determination of such a probability variation state and a time saving state, special design stop processing is complete|finished. In addition, the end determination based on the special figure variation count value is performed only when it is a time saving state, and the probability variation state may be continued until the next variable display result becomes "big hit" . Alternatively, for example, from a random counter provided in the RAM 102, numerical data indicating a random value for determining the end of the probability variable state is extracted, and by referring to the probability variable state end determination table stored in advance in the ROM 101 etc., the probability variable state is terminated. You may make it determine whether to carry out.

FIG. 10-3 is a flow chart showing an example of the processing executed in step S114 of FIG. 6 as the jackpot opening pre-processing. In the jackpot opening preprocessing shown in FIG. 10-3, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the jackpot start flag is ON (step 042AKS021). Here, the jackpot start time flag is set to the ON state in response to the jackpot flag being ON in the special symbol stop processing of step S113 shown in FIG. If the jackpot start flag is ON at step 042AKS021 (step 042AKS021; Yes), it is determined whether or not the game is waiting for the jackpot start effect (step 042AKS022). As an example, in the special symbol stop processing of step S113 shown in FIG. 3, when the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "4", the predetermined timer initial value corresponding to the waiting time for the production at the start of the big hit is It is set in the game control process timer. In this case, in the process of step S312, in response to the fact that the game control process timer value does not match the predetermined waiting time elapsing determination value (for example, "0", etc.), it is determined that the effect is waiting for the start of the big hit. , it may be judged that it is not waiting for the performance at the start of the big win in response to the coincidence.

If in step 042AKS022 waiting for the jackpot start effect, step 042AKS022; Yes), for example, after updating the game control process timer value by subtracting 1 (step 042AKS023), the jackpot opening pre-processing is terminated. On the other hand, when it is not waiting for the big win start effect at step 042AKS022 (step 042AKS022; No), the big win start time flag is cleared (step 042AKS024) and the big win opening opening number counter is cleared. Then (step 042AKS025), the jackpot type buffer value stored in the RAM 102 is read (step 042AKS026), and the opening control pattern corresponding to the jackpot type buffer value is set. In the feature part 042AK of the present embodiment, a common open control pattern is set regardless of the jackpot type. An opening control pattern different from the type may be set. Also, even if the jackpot type is "probable variation" or "non-probability variation", for example, different opening control patterns are set depending on the jackpot type of "probability variation 1" and "probability variation 2", etc. Different opening control depending on the jackpot type May be set in a pattern.

After executing the processing of step 042AKS026, it is determined whether or not the game is waiting until the opening of the big winning opening in the next round (waiting for next opening) (step 042AKS027). As an example, in the process of step 042AKS027, it is determined whether or not the game control process timer value matches the next open standby end determination value, and if it does not match, it is determined that the next open standby is in progress. If so, it can be determined that it is not waiting for the next opening. If it is waiting for the next opening at step 042AKS027 (step 042AKS027; Yes), it proceeds to step 042AKS023 and updates the game control process timer value. In addition, the game control process timer value updated at step 042AKS023 is the time set as the wait time at the start of the jackpot at step 042AKS002 shown in FIG. This is the time set as the interval time between each round.

If it is determined that the next opening is not in progress at step 042AKS027 (step 042AKS027; No), the large winning opening is opened according to the set opening control pattern and the count value of the large winning opening opening number counter. (Step 042AKS028). As an example, in the process of step 042AKS028, a timer initial value predetermined corresponding to the large winning opening opening time is set in the game control process timer, etc., and the special variable winning ball device 7 forms a large winning prize A special winning opening opening time is set as the upper limit of the time during which the opening is kept open. In addition, for example, when a solenoid drive signal to a predetermined large winning opening door solenoid is started to be output via a predetermined solenoid circuit, the large winning opening door solenoid for opening the large winning opening is turned on. state is set.

At this time, for example, when the count value of the large winning opening opening number counter is any of "1" to "15", the timer initial value corresponding to 29.5 seconds as the large winning opening opening time is set to the game control process timer. is set to

Then, the CPU 103 performs setting for transmitting a designation command during opening of the big winning opening to the effect control board 12 (step 042AKS029). After executing the process of step 042AKS029, the count value of the number of times the big winning opening is opened is updated by adding 1 (step 042AKS030), and the value of the special figure process flag is set to a value corresponding to the big hit open process. After updating to 5″ (step 042AKS031), the big winning opening pre-opening process is terminated.

FIG. 10-4 is a flow chart showing an example of the process executed in step S115 of FIG. 6 as the process during jackpot opening. In the jackpot opening process shown in FIG. 10-4, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the game ball has entered the big winning opening by, for example, determining whether or not the count switch 23 is turned on. (Step 042AKS041). At step 042AKS041, if there is no winning of the game ball into the big winning hole (step 042AKS041; No), the process proceeds to step 042AKS044.

On the other hand, at step 042AKS041, if there is a winning of the game ball into the big winning hole (step 042AKS041; Yes), the CPU 103 adds 1 to the winning number count value and updates it, and the game ball enters the big winning hole. A setting is made to transmit a prize designation command indicating that a prize has been won from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 (step 042AKS042). Then, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the updated winning prize number count value has reached a predetermined number (for example, 10) (step 042AKS043). If the winning number count value does not reach the predetermined number (step 042AKS043; No), after the game control process timer value is updated by subtracting 1 (step 042AKS044), for example, the game control process timer value corresponds to 29.5 seconds. It is determined whether or not 29.5 seconds have passed since the opening of the big winning opening, depending on whether or not the timer value is matched (step 042AKS045). At this time, if 29.5 seconds have not elapsed (step 042AKS045; No), the processing during the opening of the big winning opening is terminated.

If it is determined in step 042AKS043 that the updated winning number count value has reached the predetermined number (step 042AKS043; Yes), or if 29.5 seconds have elapsed since the large winning opening was opened in step 042AKS045 (Step 042AKS043; Yes), for example, by stopping the output of a solenoid drive signal to a predetermined solenoid for the door of the large winning opening via a predetermined solenoid circuit, the large winning opening is closed. (Step 042AKS046), and clear the winning number count value (Step 042AKS047).

After executing the process of step 042AKS047, the setting for transmitting the specified command after opening the large winning opening is made to the effect control board 12 (step 042AKS048), and the value of the special figure process flag is changed after opening the large winning opening. After updating to "6" which is the value corresponding to the process (step 042AKS049), the process during big hit opening is ended.

In this way, special symbol stop processing shown in Figure 10-2, big hit opening pre-processing shown in Figure 10-3, big hit opening process shown in Figure 10-4, etc. (including jackpot opening post-processing, jackpot end processing, etc.) is executed, the transmission setting of various effect control commands such as a winning start designation command, a large winning mouth opening designation command, a winning designation command, and a large winning mouth opening designation command is performed. Then, the command control process of step S27 in FIG. 5 is executed, and the effect control command set for transmission is transmitted to the sub-side control board such as the effect control board 12, so that the effect control board 12 side , timings such as the start of the big win, the opening (start of the round) and closing (end of the round) of the big win, the winning of the big win and the end of the big win.

FIG. 10-5 is a flow chart showing an example of the processing performed within the effect processing during the big hit in step S176 of FIG. 9 as various display processing. In the various display processes shown in FIG. 10-5, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not a hit end designation command is received (step 042AKS051). When it is determined that the number of executions of the round with the big winning opening in the open state has reached the set upper limit number of executions in the jackpot opening post-processing of step S116 in FIG. It is a command transmitted from the side of 11, and is a command for ending the effect during the big hit and executing the ending effect.

If it is determined that the hit end designation command is not received (step 042AKS051; No), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether a predetermined period has elapsed since the nR was started (elapsed of the nR predetermined period). Determine (step 042AKS052). Note that n is a variable indicating the number of rounds, and its initial value is "1" and is incremented one by one in the process of step 042AKS066, which will be described later, and is cleared to "1" in step 042AKS068. The predetermined period is 0.6 seconds, which is set as a timer value at the start of the round game. When the timer value becomes "0", it may be determined that the predetermined period has passed since the nR-th round started. More specifically, from the side of the main board 11 in response to the fact that the large winning opening is completely open (detection that the large winning opening door has moved to the position where it is completely open) A designated command during the opening of the big winning opening is transmitted, and counting of a timer value for a predetermined period may be started from the timing when the command is received.

In addition, in the characterizing part 042AK of the present embodiment, as will be described later, after a predetermined period of time has passed since the round game of the first round is started, the obtained number display indicating the number of obtained balls and the round indicating the number of rounds are displayed. display is performed. On the side of the performance control board 12, during the period from the big win to the end (the period from the fanfare to the ending), every time a winning designation command indicating that a game ball has won a prize in the big winning opening is received, the winning number is obtained. is continuously added by 15. On the side of the effect control board 12, when the winning designation command is received, it is necessary to first analyze the command, add the winning number, and display the added winning number. It takes a predetermined period of time to display. Therefore, if the predetermined period is too short, the series of processes will not be completed in time for the wins from the start of the first round game until the predetermined period elapses, and "0000" will be displayed as the number of wins. , the process of displaying "0015" may not keep up with the process of displaying "0015" despite winning ("0000" is displayed and then "0015" is displayed, giving the player a sense of discomfort). Therefore, in the characterizing part 042AK of the present embodiment, 0.6 seconds is provided as a predetermined period, and when the game ball existing in the upper part of the big winning opening at the opening timing wins from the opening until the number of rounds is displayed In addition, a period is secured in which "0015" is directly displayed without "0000" being displayed as the display of the number of acquisitions. On the other hand, in the characterizing portion 042AK of the present embodiment, the predetermined period is set to 0.6 seconds, which is the same as the firing interval in the case of continuous firing. Taking this into consideration, the time interval required for the continuously shot game balls to enter the big winning opening is the shooting interval. Therefore, the number of winnings in the big winning opening is one after the opening of the big winning opening until the number of wins is displayed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable due to an increase in the winning number display at the timing when the round number display is started due to an increase in the winning number in the state before the winning number display and the round number display are performed. can do. Although the predetermined period in the characterizing portion 042AK of the present embodiment is 0.6 seconds, which is the same as the firing interval, the predetermined period is not limited to 0.6 seconds and may be changed as appropriate.

When it is determined that the predetermined period has not passed after starting the nR (step 042AKS052; No), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether n=1, that is, whether it is the first round. Determine (step 042AKS053). n is a variable indicating the number of rounds, and is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122. As described above, the initial value is "1", and incremented by 1 in step 042AKS066, and "1" is reached in step 042AKS068. cleared to In the process of step 042AKS053, it is determined whether or not n=1 by checking the value of n.

When it is determined that n=1 (step 042AKS053; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 performs a right-handed effect to suggest that the player should hit to the right, and also suggests that a big hit game state has occurred. The operation control of the fanfare effect is performed (step 042AKS054). On the other hand, when it is determined that n≠1 (step 042AKS053; No), the effect control CPU 120 displays the number of rounds corresponding to the n−1R and the number of acquisitions, and also displays the number of rounds corresponding to the n−1R. (step 042AKS055). In the processing of step 042AKS055, for example, when n=2, the round display indicating that it is the first round and the number of wins are displayed, and the operation control of the big hit production corresponding to the first round is performed. In the process of step 042AKS055, a predetermined image is displayed on the image display device 5 as an effect during the big win, the game effect lamp 9 is illuminated in a pattern corresponding to the effect during the big win, and predetermined music and voice are emitted from the speakers 8L and 8R. It suffices if an effect of outputting The light emission pattern of the game effect lamp 9 during the big win effect may be set in advance.

After executing the process of step 042AKS054 or step 042AKS055, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not a winning designation command has been received, that is, whether or not a game ball has entered the big winning opening (step 042AKS056). In addition, in the processing of step 042AKS056, the prize winning is determined for a predetermined period from the start of the nR. When the winning designation command is not received (step 042AKS056; No), the effect control CPU 120 ends the various display processes as it is.

When the winning designation command is received, that is, when there is a winning to the big winning opening within a predetermined period after the start of the nR (step 042AKS056; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 counts the number of winning balls. is incremented by "15" (step 042AKS057). The count value of the number of winning balls is stored in advance in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 with an initial value of "0", and "15" is added by the processing of step 042AKS057 and the processing of step 042AKS063 to be described later. The number of acquired balls is continuously counted during the so-called continuous game, and is cleared to "0" at the timing when the time-saving control ends without the variable display result becoming a "jackpot", that is, at the end timing of the continuous game. . After executing the process of step 042AKS057, the effect control CPU 120 emits light from the attacker lamp 9c and outputs a winning sound corresponding to the winning (step 042AKS058). It should be noted that the light emission of the attacker lamp 9c in the processing of step 042AKS058 (the same applies to step 042AKS064) is, for example, a mode (winning The light is emitted in a manner that notifies that the Therefore, it becomes easy to visually recognize that the game ball has entered the big winning hole, and the game amusement can be improved. Regarding the light emission of the attacker lamp 9c, the number of times of light emission per unit time at the time of winning may be larger than that at the time of the jackpot effect. In addition, when a game ball wins in the big winning hole, regardless of whether or not the winning is within a predetermined period, in addition to lighting the attacker lamp 9c, a winning sound is output. Therefore, it is easy to recognize that the game ball has entered the big winning slot, and the game amusement can be improved.

After executing the processing of step 042AKS058, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not n=1, that is, whether or not it is the first round (first R), similarly to step 042AKS053 (step 042AKS059 ). If n=1, that is, if it is the first round (step 042AKS059; Yes), various display processes are terminated. On the other hand, if n≠1, i.e., if it is not the first round (step 042AKS059; No), the count value of the number of winning balls added at step 042AKS057 is displayed (display the number of winning), and the number of winning is displayed. After updating the display (step 042AKS060), various display processes are terminated. It should be noted that in the characterizing part 042AK of the present embodiment, when the acquired number update display is performed in the processing of step 042AKS060, instead of displaying the count value of the number of acquired balls that was added in step 042AKS057 as it is, As shown in 12(a-23), after performing a count-up display (notifying display that the number of acquisitions is increasing), the number of acquisitions is displayed. Therefore, it becomes easier for the player to recognize the increase in the number of winning balls, and the interest in the game can be improved.

When it is determined that a predetermined period has passed since the nR was started in step 042AKS052 of FIG. 10-5 (step 042AKS052; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 displays the number of rounds corresponding to the nR and the number of acquisitions. , and, at the same time, the operation control of the effect during the nR-th big hit is performed (step 042AKS061). If n=1, that is, if it is the first round, the display of the number of rounds and the number of acquisitions is performed for the first time in step 042AKS061. In this case, if there is a win before the lapse of the predetermined period, the number of wins is updated and displayed at step 042AKS061. Specifically, when the game ball enters the big winning hole before the predetermined period elapses, the winning number is incremented by "15" at step 042AKS057. ), the number of wins has not increased in this jackpot after the count-up display (notification display that the number of wins is increasing) is performed, as shown in FIG. 10-11 (a-21). Display the number of wins (display of "0015") that is different from the predetermined display indicating (as a specific display) (You can do this after uploading.) On the other hand, if the game ball has not entered the big winning hole before the predetermined period of time has elapsed, the winning number remains "0" and the winning number has not increased in this big hit. -22), as a predetermined display, display of the number of winnings (display of "0000") indicating that the number of winnings has not increased (in the case of consecutive games, the number of winnings at the time of the previous big win is displayed); display). As an acquisition number display (predetermined display) indicating that the number of acquisitions has not increased, other than "0000", a display other than a number such as "----" or "not increased" is used. You may do so. Further, in step 042AKS061, a predetermined image is displayed on the image display device 5 as an effect during the big win, and the game effect lamp 9 is illuminated in a pattern corresponding to the effect during the big win, and predetermined music and voice are emitted from the speakers 8L and 8R. It suffices if an effect of outputting The light emission pattern of the game effect lamp 9 during the big win effect may be set in advance. In this way, during a predetermined period after the big winning hole is opened, that is, in a situation where the winning number is not displayed, the attacker lamp 9c only lights up when the game ball enters the big winning hole. However, in a situation where the number of acquisitions after the lapse of the predetermined period is displayed, the performance effect lamp 9 provided on the multi-game machine frame 3 and the performance effect lamp 9 provided on the game board 2 are alternately displayed. , and the production effect lamp 9 emits more light than during the predetermined period. Therefore, since the specific display is performed when a prize is won within a predetermined period of time, it is possible to prevent a decline in the interest in the game without giving the player a sense of unease, and the number of winnings after the predetermined period of time is displayed. The production can be livened up and the amusement of the game can be improved. In addition, since the performance effect lamp 9 is lighted at the same timing as the execution timing of the performance during the big win, the performance can be livened up at once at the timing when the performance during the big win is executed, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

After executing the processing of step 042AKS061, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not a winning designation command is received, that is, whether or not a game ball has won a prize in a large winning opening (step 042AKS062). When the winning designation command is received, that is, when there is a winning to the big winning opening (step 042AKS062; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 adds "15" to the count value of the number of winning balls (step 042AKS063), The attacking card 9c is illuminated, a winning sound corresponding to the winning is output, a count-up display (notifying display that the winning number increases) is performed, and then the winning number update display is performed to display the winning number. (Step 042AKS064).

After executing the processing of step 042AKS064, or when the winning designation command is not received at step 042AKS062 (step 042AKS062; No), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether the n+1R which is the next round of the nR has started. It is determined whether or not (step 042AKS065). In step 042AKS065, for example, it may be determined by whether or not a special winning opening open specification command indicating the start of the (n+1)th R is received from the main board 11 side. When the n+1R has not started, that is, when the command for specifying during the opening of the big winning opening is not received and the nR remains (step 042AKS065; No), the effect control CPU 120 ends various display processes as it is. . On the other hand, when the n+1R starts, that is, when the large winning opening open specification command indicating the start of the n+1R is received (step 042AKS065; Yes), n is incremented by "1" (step 042AKS066) and then various display processes exit. For example, if n=1, ie the first round, then n=2 at step 042AKS066. Although n=2 and this is the second round, it is determined as No in steps 042AKS052 and 053 until the predetermined period has elapsed, and in step 042AKS055, it corresponds to the first round which is n-1R. A round display is performed, and after a predetermined period of time has elapsed, a round display corresponding to the second round, which is the nR-th round, is performed (displayed in the processing of step 042AKS061 after determination of Yes in step 042AKS052).

If it is determined at step 042AKS051 that the hit end designation command has been received (step 042AKS051; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 sets the end of the big hit effect corresponding to the round in order to perform the ending effect (step 042AKS067), clears n to 1 (step 042AKS068), and terminates various display processes.

Next, display timings for displaying the number of rounds, displaying the number of wins, etc., and examples of effect operations will be specifically described with reference to FIGS. 10-6 to 10-14. Note that the illustrated example shows a case of a so-called initial win (first big win) instead of a consecutive game.

FIG. 10-6 is a timing chart showing the opening timing of the big winning opening, the timing of various displays, and the like. FIGS. 10-7 to 10-14 are diagrams showing an example of effect operation display, the opening/closing state of the big winning opening, and the lighting state of various lamps on the image display device 5. FIG. As shown in FIGS. 10-6 and 10-7 (a-1), when a combination of decoration symbols constituting a big win is stopped and displayed, a big win game state is entered. At this stage, as shown in FIG. 10-7(b-1), the big winning opening is closed. In addition, in order to notify the player of the big hit, as shown in FIG. Various production effect lamps 9 such as 9eR, the lower lamp 9f of the display device, and the general winning opening vicinity lamp 9g are turned on. In the illustrated example, the upper stage is the effect lamp 9 provided on the game machine frame 3 and the lower stage is the effect lamp 9 provided on the game board 2 .

When the jackpot hits, as shown in FIG. 10-6, during the period until the predetermined period of the first round ends, a right-handed performance and a fanfare performance are performed to inform the player that the player should hit right (FIG. 10-6). 5 step 042AKS054). The period from the big win to the start of the 1st R shown in FIG. 10-6 is a period sufficiently longer than the predetermined period. Specifically, first, as shown in FIG. 10-7(a-2), a fanfare effect image is displayed on the image display device 5. All the production effect lamps 9 are turned off once. Then, the performance effect lamps 9 are turned on in order from the lower left side to the upper left side, the center portion, the upper right side, and the lower right side, and a right-handed performance is performed by displaying "Right-handed" in a large size on the image display device. Incidentally, the small right-handed display displayed in the upper right portion of the image display device 5 shown in FIG. 10-7(a-2) may be displayed continuously during the jackpot game state.

Specifically, in the right-handed effect, as shown in FIGS. Display continues. Therefore, the lighting order of the effect lamps 9 will be described below. When the right-handed effect is started, as shown in FIG. 10-7 (c-3), the general winning opening vicinity lamp 9g provided at the lower left of the game area is first lit, followed by FIG. 10-7 ( As shown in c-4), the lower left lamp 9bL1, which is the lower left frame lamp 9, lights up. Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 10-7 (c-5), of the display device lower lamps 9f provided below the image display device 5 on the game board 2, the left display device lower lamp 9fL lights up, and then As shown in FIG. 10-7 (c-6), the upper left lamp 9bL2, which is the frame lamp 9 in the upper left part, lights up, and as shown in FIG. 10-8 (c-7), the speaker lamp corresponding to the speaker 8L part 9eL lights up. In this way, the performance effect lamps 9 are lit in order from the lower left side of the pachinko game machine 1 toward the upper left side. As shown in FIG. 10-8(b-7), since the big winning hole is in a closed state, the launched game medium does not enter the big winning hole at this stage. The example shown in FIG. 10-8 (b-7) shows an example in which the launched game ball passes through the second path in the upper portion of the big winning opening door and is led to the discharge path.

Next, as shown in FIG. 10-8 (c-8), the movable body lamp 9d corresponding to the movable body 32 provided in the central upper part of the game board 2 lights up, and FIG. 10-8 (c-9 ), when the main lamp 9 above the image display device 5 in the gaming machine frame 3 lights up, the effect lamp 9 provided in the upper central portion of the pachinko gaming machine 1 lights up.

Next, as shown in FIG. 10-8 (c-10), the speaker lamp 9eR corresponding to the speaker 8R portion lights up, and then as shown in FIG. 10-8 (c-11), the frame lamp in the upper right portion 9 is lit, and as shown in FIG. The lower lamp 9fR lights up. Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 10-9 (c-13), the lower right lamp 9bR1 which is the frame lamp 9 in the lower right part lights up, and the attacker lamp 9c provided near the special variable winning ball device 7 lights up. do. In this way, the performance effect lamps 9 are lit in order from the upper right side of the pachinko game machine 1 toward the lower right side. As a result, the performance effect lamp 9 is lit in order from the lower left side to the upper left side, the center part, and then the upper right side to the lower right side of the pachinko game machine 1, so that the player hits right on the performance effect lamp 9. A right-handed production that suggests will be performed. In this example, both the effect lamp 9 provided on the game machine frame 3 and the effect lamp 9 provided on the game board 2 are used to suggest a right-hand shot. may be In addition, only the effect lamp 9 provided on the game machine frame 3 is lit from the lower left side to the center and to the lower right direction, and the effect lamp 9 provided on the game board 2 alone is lit from the lower left side to the center and right. Both of them may be lit simultaneously or with a time lag, such as lighting downward.

After the right hitting effect on the effect lamp 9 is completed, all the effect lamps 9 are extinguished as shown in FIG. 10-9 (c-15). Note that, as shown in FIG. 10-9 (a-15), the display of hitting to the right on the image display device 5 continues (the effect of hitting to the right is being executed).

Next, as shown in FIG. 10-6, when the opening timing of the big winning opening comes, the 1st R is started, and the big winning opening is opened as shown in FIG. 10-10 (b-16). At this stage, as shown in FIG. 10-10 (a-16), the right-handed display on the image display device 5 is continuously performed, and until a predetermined period elapses, as shown in FIG. 10-10 (c-16) 10-10 (a-19) and (c-19). Even if all the effect lamps 9 are not turned off, any one of the indices such as luminous intensity, brightness, and illuminance may be set lower than usual. In addition, as shown in FIG. 10-10 (b-16), even after the large winning opening is opened, until a predetermined period elapses, the As shown in (c-13), the production effect lamps 9 may be turned on sequentially to suggest a right-hand shot. In this case, the lighting speed of each effect lamp may be made faster than before the opening of the big prize opening (the lighting period may be shortened and the transition speed may be made faster). In addition, when the effect lamps 9 are sequentially lit after the big winning hole is opened to suggest hitting to the right, after the attacker lamp 9c that is lit last is lit, it is shown in FIG. 10-9 (c-15). It is also possible to keep the lighting state as it is without turning off the light. According to this, it is possible to make the player aware that the big winning opening is in the open state.

Then, as shown in FIG. 10-10 (b-17), when the big winning opening is completely opened, a count of 0.6 seconds is started as a predetermined period corresponding to the first R, and FIG. As shown in (b-18), when the game ball enters the big winning hole, the game ball is detected by the count switch 23, and a winning designation command is transmitted from the main board 11 side to the effect control board 12 side. Before the 1st R is started (before the big winning hole is opened), the game ball launched by performing the right-handed effect (game ball hit early) also has the big winning hole open. If it exists in the upper part of the big winning opening at the timing, it is possible to win within a predetermined period corresponding to the 1st round. On the side of the effect control board 12, by the processing of step 042AKS058 in FIG. 10-5, the winning sound is output as shown in FIG. 10-10 (b-18), and FIG. 10-10 (c-18) 2, the attacker lamp 9c lights up in a manner to notify that a prize has been won. In addition, as described above, the light emission of the attacker lamp 9c is performed in a manner that is more than the number of times of light emission per unit time of the game effect lamps 9 other than the attacker lamp 9c, which emits light during the jackpot middle effect, for example. In the example shown in FIG. 10-10 (b-18), the launched game ball passes through the first path, which is the path in the direction of the big winning opening, and is guided to the winning path provided with the count switch 23. example. In addition, the special variable winning ball device 7 is configured so that the time until the game ball present at the big winning opening door portion is detected by the count switch 23 is 0.6 seconds or less, which is a predetermined period. Therefore, it is possible to increase the possibility that the game ball existing above the big winning hole is detected by the count switch 23 within a predetermined period after the opening of the big winning hole, and the decrease in the interest in the game can be prevented without making the player feel uneasy. can be prevented.

10-10 (b-18) after the game ball has entered the big winning opening, or time has passed without winning from the state shown in FIG. 10-10 (b-17), 10 (a-19), (b-19) and (c-19) after a predetermined period of time, as shown in FIG. Since the execution timing has come and the execution timing for displaying the number of acquisitions has come, the processing of step 042AKS061 in FIG. 10-5 is executed.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 10-10 (b-18), when the game ball enters the big winning opening before the predetermined period elapses, as shown in FIG. 10-11 (a-20), the second The number of rounds of "1R" indicating that it is one round is displayed, and a count-up display is also performed. In addition, at the same timing as these displays, as an effect during the big hit (effect during the 1st R), as shown in FIG. , and characters are displayed. The decorative patterns that make up the big hit displayed as the production during the jackpot (production during the 1st R) and the display of “during BOUNUS” are not shown (the same applies to FIGS. 10 to 20 described later). It is displayed in a manner suggesting that the ball should be hit to the right as shown at 10-21. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 10-21 (A-1), a fanfare or right-handed effect is performed, and after a predetermined period of time has passed since the big winning opening is opened, the effect during the big win is shown in FIG. 10-21. As shown in (A-2), a symbol "7", which is a decorative symbol that constitutes a big win, is displayed facing the front, and is displayed above "B" in the display of "BOUNUS". A star image is displayed. Next, as shown in FIG. 10-21 (A-3), the symbol "7", which is the decorative symbol that constitutes the big win, is tilted toward the back right. A star-shaped image shifts to the top of "O". Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 10-21 (A-4), the symbol "7", which is a decorative symbol that constitutes a big win, faces the front, and a star is placed above "N" in the "BOUNUS" display. The shape image shifts. After that, as shown in FIG. 10-21 (A-5), the symbol "7", which is the decorative symbol that constitutes the big win, is tilted toward the back left. , a star-shaped image shifts to the top of . Then, as shown in FIG. 10-21 (A-6), the pattern "7", which is the decorative pattern that constitutes the big win, faces the front, and a star is placed above "S" in the display of "BOUNUS". The shape image shifts and returns to FIG. 10-21 (A-2). In this way, during the big win effect, the decoration patterns that constitute the big win are moved in the right back direction, the front direction, and the left back direction, and a star-shaped image is displayed rightward from the characters on the left of the display of "BOUNUS in progress". This suggests to the player that he should hit to the right by shifting the . The action display of decorative patterns and the transitional display of star-shaped images that constitute a big win are called effect displays. It includes indications such as turning to the right. That is, the effect display may be displayed in a manner suggesting right-handed hitting. According to this, the effect display suggests that the player should hit the ball to the right, making it easier to recognize the hitting to the right.

In addition, during the big-hit production, the production effect lamp 9 is lit according to a light emission pattern preset according to the big-hit production, as shown in FIG. 10-11 (c-20). In this example, a light emission pattern is set in which the effect lamps 9 provided on the game machine frame 3 and the effect lamps 9 provided on the game board 2 are alternately lit. Then, as shown in FIG. 10-11 (a-21), "0015" is displayed as the acquired number display. In this way, the effect lamp 9 does not emit light as shown in FIGS. As shown in -11 (c-20) and (c-22), the production effect lamp 9 is lit after the display of the number of acquisitions after a predetermined period of time has elapsed is displayed. Therefore, it is possible to encourage the player to suppress the rapid shooting and promote the firing timing.

On the other hand, if the predetermined period has passed without the game ball entering the big winning slot, as shown in FIG. is displayed. In addition, the point that the number of rounds of "1R" indicating that it is one round is displayed, and the decoration pattern that constitutes the big hit is displayed as a production during the big hit (production during the 1st R), the display of "During BOUNUS", and The point that the character is displayed and the point that the effect lamp 9 is lit according to the predetermined light emission pattern according to the effect during the big win are common regardless of whether the prize is won or not.

Next, as time passes, as shown in FIG. 10-12 (b-23), when the 10th game ball wins the big winning opening in the 1R, the upper limit that can open the big winning opening period. In addition, along with the winning, the processing of step 042AKS064 shown in FIG. 10-5 is executed, the count-up display is performed as shown in FIG. 10-12 (a-23), and FIG. 10-12 (a-24). As shown in , the acquisition number display of "0150" is performed. In addition, along with the winning, a winning sound is output as shown in FIG. ), the attacker lamp 9c lights up in a manner notifying that a prize has been won. Incidentally, the upper limit period for which the big winning opening can be opened is a sufficient period even if it is counted from the elapse of the predetermined period for the winning of 10 game balls. Specifically, the upper limit period is 29.5 seconds after opening, and is 28.9 seconds even after the predetermined period has elapsed. Since the interval between consecutive shots is 0.6 seconds, it is a period in which 10 prizes can be won. Therefore, it is possible to give the player a sense of security because a sufficient amount of time is guaranteed for winning a prize.

When the 10th game ball wins the big prize hole in the 1st R, the maximum period in which the big prize hole can be opened is reached, so the big prize hole is opened as shown in FIG. controlled to be closed. After that, until the second R shown in FIG. 10-6 is started, the big winning opening is controlled to be completely closed as shown in FIG. 10-12 (b-25). On the other hand, until the predetermined period of the 2nd R elapses (until the predetermined period of time elapses after n=2), the number of rounds corresponding to the 1st R is displayed as shown in FIG. , the effect during the big win is continuously performed (the display of the winning number is updated according to the winning), and the effect lamp 9 corresponds to the effect during the big win as shown in FIG. 10-12 (c-25). to light up.

In the 1st round, when the 10th game ball enters the big winning hole and the upper limit period is reached, the big winning hole is controlled to be closed. There is a case where a so-called over-winning in which the ball enters the big winning opening following the 10th game ball may occur. Even in the case of over-winning, the count-up display is performed as shown in FIG. In this case, after the count-up display and win count display corresponding to the tenth win, the count-up display and win count display corresponding to the over win are performed continuously, but FIG. 10-12 (b-25). As shown in , the count-up display and winning number display corresponding to the over-winning are completed within a period from when the big winning port is completely closed until it becomes an open state corresponding to the 2nd R. Therefore, the player can easily recognize that an over-win has occurred in the 1st round, and the game interest can be improved. In addition, since the update of the display of the number of acquisitions in the opening corresponding to the first round does not overlap with the display of the number of acquisitions in the opening corresponding to the second round, it is possible to determine whether the winning corresponds to the opening of the round. easier. Also, the winning sound corresponding to the over winning may be a sound different from the normal winning sound (over winning sound). In this case, when the count value exceeds the upper limit of "10", the over-winning sound may be output. Also, the attacker lamp 9c may emit light in a mode corresponding to an over-win, which is different from light emission in a normal winning mode.

Then, corresponding to the second round, as shown in FIG. 10-6, the timing comes when the big winning hole is opened again, and the big winning hole is opened again as shown in FIG. 10-13 (b-26). controlled to be At this time, it is determined as Yes in step 042AKS065 of FIG. Become. At this stage, since the process of step 042AKS055 in FIG. 10-5 is executed, as shown in FIG. A display is made (see also FIG. 10-6).

Next, as shown in FIG. 10-13 (b-27), when the big winning hole is completely opened and the game ball enters the big winning hole, unlike the first R, the step of FIG. 10-5 In the processing of 042AKS060, a count-up display is performed as shown in FIG. 10-13 (a-27), and the acquisition number display of "0165" is performed as shown in FIG. 10-13 (a-28). In addition, along with the winning, a winning sound is output as shown in FIG. ), the attacker lamp 9c lights up. In this way, in rounds other than the 1st round, even if the prize is won during a predetermined period, the winning number is updated and displayed during the predetermined period. Then, when the 2R predetermined period elapses, the process of step 042AKS061 in FIG. 10-5 is executed. Therefore, as shown in FIG. ' is displayed, and a big win middle effect corresponding to the 2nd R is executed. In this case, the number "1" in the round number display of "1R", which is the first round, is changed to "2". That is, "R" is continuously displayed from the first round. Further, the display of "1R" is continuously displayed until the second R predetermined period elapses. In addition, in the characteristic part 042AK of this embodiment, an example is shown in which a common jackpot production is executed regardless of the number of rounds (the same applies to lighting control of the production effect lamp 9), but it is executed in each round. The performance during the jackpot to be played may be varied. The lighting of the production effect lamp 9 is the same. In this way, since the big winning hole is opened before the number of rounds indicating that it is the second round is displayed, the game balls of the player who has been continuously shot from the first round can be released at an early stage. You can win a prize in the big prize mouth. Therefore, in each round of a plurality of round games, it is possible to increase the possibility that the continuously shot game balls will win the big winning opening opened earlier than the round display.

On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 10-13 (a-26), (b-26), and (c-26), the opening of the big winning opening is controlled corresponding to the second R, and FIG. 10-13 (a-29) ), (b-29), and (c-29), when a predetermined period of time has passed without the game ball winning after the big winning hole is completely opened, FIG. 10-14 (a-31) ), (b-31), and (c-31), the number of wins acquired in the 1st R is displayed continuously. Thereafter, similar processing is performed up to the predetermined final round, and when it is determined that the winning end designation command is received in step 042AKS051 of FIG. Set to terminate. In this way, from the second round onward, if no prize is won within a predetermined period, the number of wins displayed in the previous round will continue to be displayed, while if a prize is won during the predetermined period , the number of obtained balls is added to the display of the number of obtained balls displayed in the previous round and displayed. Therefore, even after the second round, it is possible to easily recognize the winning of the big winning slot.

In addition, for example, in the final round, when the 10th game ball wins the big winning hole and reaches the upper limit period, the big winning hole is controlled to be closed, but at this time, the 11th game ball As shown in FIGS. 10-15, the big win game state may end while the ball is caught in the special variable winning ball device 7 (more specifically, between the big winning door and the glass door frame 3a). . In this case, at the start of the 1st round (when the big winning slot corresponding to the 1st round is opened) in the case of the next big hit, the game ball will enter the big winning slot, and during the predetermined period of the 1st round Winning of game balls occurs. Also in this case, as shown in FIG. As shown in (a-21), "0015" may be displayed as the display of the acquired number after performing the count-up display. Also, in such a case, there is a possibility that the launched game ball will win a prize during the predetermined period (possibility that the second ball will win a prize). As shown in a-20) and (a-21), after the count-up display is performed, "0030" may be directly displayed as the acquired number display without displaying "0000" or "0015". According to this, it is possible to give the player a sense of surprise and improve the game interest.

As described above, according to the pachinko game machine 1 of the characteristic part 042AK in this embodiment, the following effects can be obtained.

The effect control CPU 120 displays the winning number in the process of step 042AKS061 in FIG. 10-5 after a predetermined period of time after the first round is started with the big winning opening opened. Then, if the game ball does not enter the big winning slot within a predetermined period after the start of the first round, a predetermined display indicating that the winning number has not increased is performed after the predetermined period. When a game ball wins a prize in a big winning hole within a predetermined period after the start of one round, the obtained number is displayed as a specific display different from the predetermined display after the predetermined period. According to this, since the specific display is performed when a prize is won within a predetermined period, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game without making the player feel uneasy.

In addition, the effect control CPU 120, when the game ball wins the big winning hole within a predetermined period after the start of the first round, directly specifies without displaying the winning number of "0000" as a predetermined display. Display the acquisition number display of "0015" as a display. According to this, it is possible to prevent the player from being confused and to prevent the decline in the interest in the game.

In addition, the effect control CPU 120 performs count-up display as a notification display that the number of winnings increases when the game ball enters the big winning hole within a predetermined period after the start of the first round. , display the acquired number display of "0015" as a specific display. According to this, it is possible to easily recognize that there is a prize and the number of wins increases.

In addition, the effect control CPU 120 counts the timer value for a predetermined period from the timing of receiving the command for specifying during the opening of the large winning opening transmitted from the main board 11 in response to the opening of the large winning opening. is started, and the acquired number is displayed after a predetermined period of time has elapsed. According to this, the predetermined period is preferably counted, and when the prize is won within the predetermined period, the specific display is performed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the decrease in the interest in the game without making the player feel uneasy.

In addition, the pachinko game machine 1, by closing the large winning opening door, guides the launched game ball to the discharge route through the second route of the upper part of the large winning opening door, By opening the winning opening door, the shot game ball is guided to the big winning opening through the first path and detected by the count switch 23. - 特許庁The special variable winning ball device 7 is configured so that the time until the game ball present at the big winning opening door portion is detected by the count switch 23 is 0.6 seconds or less, which is a predetermined period. . According to this, it is possible to increase the possibility that the game ball existing above the big winning hole is detected by the count switch 23 within a predetermined period after the opening of the big winning hole, and the game is interesting without giving the player a sense of unease. can be prevented from decreasing.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 10-6, the effect control CPU 120, as shown in FIG. The effect is displayed to the player to indicate that he/she should hit to the right. According to this, since the game area to be shot during the big hit is suggested, the game method can be easily recognized and the game interest can be improved.

The open state of the big winning gate means that the big winning gate is in a completely open state, that is, the state where the big winning gate has moved to a position where it is in a completely open state. In response to detecting that the game has moved to a completely open position, the main board 11 side transmits a designation command while the big winning opening is open. According to this, since the predetermined period is counted after the big winning opening is completely opened, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game without making the player feel uneasy.

In addition, the game ball (fast-hit game ball) launched by performing the right-handed effect before the 1st R starts (before the big winning hole is opened) also has the big winning hole open. If it exists above the big winning opening at the timing, it is possible to win within the predetermined period corresponding to the 1st R, and the effect control CPU 120, when winning within the predetermined period, after the predetermined period, the specific Acquisition number display as display is performed. According to this, it is possible to prevent the game balls hit quickly from being wasted.

Also, for example, in the final round, when the 10th game ball wins the big winning hole and the upper limit period is reached, the big winning hole is controlled to be closed, but at this time, the 11th game ball As shown in FIGS. 10-15, the big win game state may end while the ball is caught in the special variable winning ball device 7 (more specifically, between the big winning door and the glass door frame 3a). . In this case, at the start of the 1st round (when the big winning slot corresponding to the 1st round is opened) in the case of the next big hit, the game ball will enter the big winning slot, and during the predetermined period of the 1st round A game ball wins, and the effect control CPU 120 displays the winning number as a specific display after the predetermined period of time has elapsed. According to this, it is possible to prevent dissatisfaction felt by the player when an irregular event occurs.

In addition, the effect control CPU 120 can execute a fanfare effect suggesting that a big win game state has been reached while the big winning hole is in a closed state and then in an open state. Then, after the big winning opening is opened and a predetermined period has passed, the winning number display and the round number display can be performed, and an effect during the big win corresponding to the round game can be executed. According to this, it is possible to sharpen the presentation and improve the amusement of the game.

Further, the effect control CPU 120, as shown in FIG. The attacker lamp 9c is turned on as shown in FIG. 10-10 (c-18). Also, as shown in FIG. 10-12 (b-23), even if the game ball wins in the big winning hole other than the predetermined period, as shown in FIG. 10-12 (c-23), the attacker lamp Light 9c. According to this, since the specific display is performed when a prize is won within a predetermined period, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game without making the player feel uneasy, and the fact that the prize has been won within the predetermined period can be visually recognized. easier.

In addition, the effect control CPU 120 controls the light emission of the attacker lamp 9c in the processing of step 042AKS058 in FIG. Light is emitted in a mode (a mode for notifying that a prize has been won) that is more than the number of times of light emission per time. According to this, it becomes easy to visually recognize that the game ball has entered the big winning hole, and the game interest can be improved.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 10-10 (b-18), the effect control CPU 120, when a game ball enters the big winning opening during a predetermined period after the opening of the big winning opening, A winning sound corresponding to winning is output. Also, as shown in FIG. 10-12 (b-23), even when a game ball wins in the big winning hole outside the predetermined period, a winning sound corresponding to the winning is output. According to this, it becomes easy to recognize that the game ball has entered the big winning hole, and the game interest can be improved.

In addition, for the rounds after the first round, the effect control CPU 120 displays the number of rounds corresponding to the round in the processing of step 042AKS061 in FIG. 10-5 after a predetermined period after the start of the round. conduct. According to this, since a specific display is performed when a prize is won within a predetermined period, it is possible to prevent a decline in the interest in the game without making the player feel uneasy, and in each round of a plurality of round games, It is possible to increase the possibility of winning the game balls continuously shot to the big winning hole opened earlier than the round display.

In addition, the effect control CPU 120, when the round game after the second round is performed, if the game medium does not win the big winning opening within a predetermined period after the opening state of the big winning opening, as shown in FIG. As shown in 10-14 (a-31), when the display of the winning number displayed in the previous round game is continued to be displayed, and at the same time, the game medium wins in the big winning slot within the predetermined period. , as shown in FIG. 10-14 (a-30), adds the number of winning balls given corresponding to the winning from the winning number display displayed in the previous round game and displays it. According to this, even after the second round, it is possible to easily recognize the winning of the big winning opening.

In addition, the effect control CPU 120 performs count-up display as shown in FIG. In this case, after the count-up display and win count display corresponding to the tenth win, the count-up display and win count display corresponding to the over win are performed continuously, but FIG. 10-12 (b-25). As shown in , the count-up display and winning number display corresponding to the over-winning are completed within a period from when the big winning port is completely closed until it becomes an open state corresponding to the 2nd R. According to this, the update of the winning number display at the time of one opening does not overlap with the update of the winning number display at the time of the next opening, so that it is easy to determine which opening corresponds to the win.

In addition, the effect control CPU 120, during a predetermined period after the large winning opening is opened, that is, in a situation where the winning number display is not performed, as shown in FIG. 10-10 (c-18), Although the attacker lamp 9c only lights up when the ball enters the big winning hole, in a situation where the number of wins after the predetermined period is displayed, for example, FIG. 10-11 (c-20) or ( As shown in c-21), the production effect lamp 9 provided in the multiple game machine frame 3 and the production effect lamp 9 provided in the game board 2 are alternately turned on, and more than during the predetermined period. The production effect lamp 9 emits light. According to this, since a specific display is performed when a prize is won within a predetermined period, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game without making the player feel uneasy, and the number of wins after the predetermined period is displayed. It is possible to liven up the subsequent production and improve the amusement of the game.

10-6, the effect control CPU 120 can execute a right-handed effect and a fanfare effect before the start of the first round. 10-7(c-3) to 10-9(c-13), the production effect lamp 9 may be turned on sequentially to suggest right-handed hitting, and after a predetermined period of time has elapsed, Regarding, for example, as shown in FIGS. The lamps 9 are lit alternately. According to this, the production effect lamp 9 can be used to suggest a right-hand shot. In addition, when the effect lamps 9 are sequentially lit after the big winning hole is opened to suggest hitting to the right, after the attacker lamp 9c that is lit last is lit, it is shown in FIG. 10-9 (c-15). It is also possible to keep the lighting state as it is without extinguishing the light, thereby making the player aware that the big winning hole is in the open state.

Also, the upper limit period during which the big winning opening can be opened is a period sufficient for ten game balls to win even if counted after the predetermined period has passed. According to this, it is possible to give the player a sense of security because a sufficient amount of time is guaranteed for winning a prize.

In addition, the effect control CPU 120, as shown in FIGS. 10-11 (c-20) and (c-22), the production effect lamp 9 is illuminated after the display of the number of acquisitions after a predetermined period of time is displayed. Let According to this, it is possible to encourage the player to suppress the rapid shooting and promote the launch timing.

10-11 (c-20) and (c-22), the production control CPU 120 emits the production effect lamp 9 at the same timing as the execution timing of the production during the jackpot after the elapse of the predetermined period. Let According to this, the performance can be livened up at once at the timing when the performance during the big win is executed, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 10-21, the effect control CPU 120, at the timing when the number of wins is displayed, displays the effect display of transitional display of decorative symbols and star-shaped images that constitute the big win, suggesting hitting to the right. mode. According to this, the effect display suggests that the ball should be hit to the right, and the player can easily recognize that the ball should be hit to the right.

(Modified example of characteristic part 042AK)
In the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 10-9 (a-15), (b-15), and (c-15), the production effect lamps 9 turn on in order to suggest that the player should hit to the right. Although the example of turning off all the effect lamps 9 after the right-handed effect by the effect lamps 9 is completed, this is just an example. For example, after the states shown in FIGS. 10-9 (a-15), (b-15), and (c-15), FIGS. 10-16 (c-16A) at the timing (FIG. 10-16 (b-16A)) where the big winning hole is opened, the vicinity of the special variable winning ball device 7 An attacker lamp 9c provided at the position may be lit. According to this, it is possible for the player to easily visually recognize that the big winning opening is in the open state. The attacker lamp 9c may be lit continuously until a predetermined period elapses or during the open period.

Further, in the above embodiment, when the round display is updated from the first round to the second round, the number "1" in the round number display of "1R", which is the first round, is changed to "2". , "R" is continuously displayed from the first round, and the display of "1R" is continuously displayed until the predetermined period of the second R elapses, but this is just an example. be. For example, as shown in FIG. 10-17, at the end of the open state corresponding to the first round, that is, at the timing when the big winning hole is closed, the display of "1" out of the display of "1R" is erased. , "R" may be displayed only. Then, "2" may be displayed at the timing when the second R predetermined period has elapsed, and "2R" indicating the second round may be displayed. It should be noted that the same applies to the second and subsequent rounds. According to this, the end of each round can be visually recognized, and the game can be sharpened.

Further, in the above embodiment, an example is shown in which the maximum number of prizes to be won is 10 (maximum number of prizes to be won is 10), which is the upper limit period during which the big prize opening can be opened. , it may be so arranged that if two coins are received during a predetermined period before the number of rounds is displayed, an over-win is awarded. In this case, a sound different from the normal winning sound (over winning sound) may be output as the winning sound for the over winning during the predetermined period, and the attacker lamp 9c may also emit light in a manner indicating the occurrence of the over winning. .

Further, in the above-described embodiment, an example of counting the number of game balls entering the big winning hole is shown for the display of the winning number. good too. Since the right-handed ball is hit during the big hit, the general winning hole for winning the prize is the general winning hole 10 provided above the variable winning ball device 6B. FIGS. 10-18 are flow charts showing an example of various display processes in the case of counting winnings to the general winning opening 10 during the big win. The description of the same parts as in FIG. 10-5 will be omitted.

In the various display processes shown in FIGS. 10-18, when it is determined that the winning designation command has not been received at step 042AKS056 (step 042AKS056; No), a general winning showing that the game ball has entered the general winning opening 10 It is determined whether or not the designated command has been received (step 042AKS081). Then, when the general winning designation command is received, that is, when there is a winning to the general winning slot 10 (step 042AKS081; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 adds "3" to the count value of the number of winning balls ( step 042AKS082). After executing the processing of step 042AKS082, or when the general winning designation command is not received, that is, when there is no winning to the general winning opening 10 (step 042AKS081; No), the processing of step 042AKS059 is performed. In addition, along with the winning of the general winning hole 10, a winning sound indicating that the game ball has won the general winning hole 10 (a winning sound different from the case of winning the big winning hole) may be output.

In addition, in the various display processes shown in FIGS. 10-18, when it is determined that the winning designation command has not been received at step 042AKS062 (step 042AKS062; No), it further indicates that the game ball has entered the general winning opening 10. It is determined whether or not a general winning designation command has been received (step 042AKS083). Then, when the general winning designation command is received, that is, when there is a winning to the general winning slot 10 (step 042AKS083; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 adds "3" to the count value of the number of winning balls ( Step 042AKS083), update display of the acquired number (step 042AKS085). When performing the acquired number update display in step 042 AKS085, the acquired number display is performed after performing the display of counting up (notifying display that the acquired number increases). After executing the processing of step 042AKS085, or when the general winning designation command is not received, that is, when there is no winning to the general winning opening 10 (step 042AKS083; No), the processing of step 042AKS065 is performed. In addition, along with the winning of the general winning hole 10, a winning sound indicating that the game ball has won the general winning hole 10 (a winning sound different from the case of winning the big winning hole) may be output.

Next, an example of an effect operation and the like in the case of counting winnings to the general winning opening 10 will be described with reference to FIGS. 10-19 and 10-20. FIGS. 10-19 and 10-20 are diagrams showing an example of effect operation display, the opening/closing state of the big winning opening, and the lighting state of various lamps on the image display device 5. FIG. (a-16), (b-16), (c-16), (a-17), (b-17), and (c-17) shown in Figure 10-19 are shown in Figure 10-10 ( a-16), (b-16), (c-16), (a-17), (b-17), and (c-17). As shown in the figure, when the big winning opening is opened, a count of 0.6 seconds is started as a predetermined period. When the game ball enters the general winning hole 10, it shifts to the state shown in FIGS. 10-19 (a-18A), (b-18A), and (c-18A). 10-19 (b-18A), after the game ball has entered the general winning opening 10, or from the state shown in FIG. Time passes without winning the winning opening 10, and when a predetermined period of time elapses as shown in FIGS. When a prize is won in mouth 10, the state shifts to the states shown in FIGS. , the number of rounds of "1R" indicating that it is the first round is displayed, and a count-up display is performed. In addition, at the same timing as these displays, as a production during the big hit (production during the 1st R), as shown in FIG. , and characters are displayed. During the big-hit production, as shown in FIG. 10-20 (c-20A), the production effect lamp 9 is lit according to a light emission pattern preset according to the big-hit production. Then, as shown in FIG. 10-20 (a-21A), "0003" is displayed as the acquired number display.

On the other hand, if a predetermined period of time has passed without the game ball winning the general winning slot 10, as shown in FIG. ” is displayed. In addition, the point that the number of rounds of "1R" indicating that it is one round is displayed, and the decoration pattern that constitutes the big hit is displayed as a production during the big hit (production during the 1st R), the display of "During BOUNUS", and The point that the character is displayed and the point that the effect lamp 9 is lit according to the predetermined light emission pattern according to the effect during the big win are common regardless of whether the prize is won or not.

Thus, even if the game ball wins the general winning opening 10 during the predetermined period after the large winning opening is opened at the start of the first round, the predetermined After the period has passed, "0003" is displayed as the winning number display in response to the winning in the general winning slot 10. FIG. Further, when no game ball wins in the general winning hole 10 during the predetermined period, "0000" is displayed as a predetermined display indicating that no prize ball has been awarded. Therefore, the winning number corresponding to the winning is also displayed for the game balls that have won the general winning hole 10 during the predetermined period, so that the player can be prevented from feeling uneasy.

(Description of means related to characteristic part 042AK)
(1) The game machine according to the characteristic part 042AK is
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1, etc.) that can be controlled in an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player,
Display means (for example, the effect control CPU 120 that instructs the display content to the image display device 5, etc.),
Variable winning means (e.g., special variable winning ball device 7) capable of changing between a first state in which the game medium is easy to win and a second state in which the game medium cannot or is difficult to win,
Control means (for example, A CPU 103 etc. that performs a round game) and
The display means is
It is possible to display a given amount display related to the given amount of game value given when the game medium wins to the variable winning means (for example, display the number of wins),
When the first round game is played out of the plurality of round games, the given amount display is displayed after a predetermined period of time after the variable winning means changes from the second state to the first state. (For example, in the first round, display the number of wins after a predetermined period of time has passed after the big prize opening is opened),
If the game medium does not win the variable prize winning means within the predetermined period, a predetermined display corresponding to the fact that the game value is not given is displayed as the display of the amount to be given after the predetermined period has elapsed (for example, the number of wins). display "0000" as a display, etc.),
If the game medium wins the variable prize winning means within the predetermined period, a specific display different from the predetermined display is displayed as the display of the awarded amount after the predetermined period (for example, "0015" is displayed as the display of the winning number). etc.),
It is characterized by

According to such a configuration, since a specific display is performed when a prize is won within a predetermined period, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game without giving the player a sense of unease.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above,
The display means displays the specific display without displaying the predetermined display (for example, displays "0015" instead of displaying "0000" when the game medium wins the variable winning section within the predetermined period of time). display),
You may do so.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from being confused and to prevent the decline in the interest in the game.

(3) In the gaming machine described in (1) or (2) above,
When the game medium wins the variable winning means within the predetermined period, the display means performs a count-up display indicating that the game value has been awarded, and then displays the value given as the specific display. Display according to game value (for example, display "0015" after performing count-up display as notification display that the number of acquisitions increases),
You may do so.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to make it easier to recognize that there is a prize and the number of wins will increase.

(4) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (3) above,
The display means starts displaying the awarded amount display after the predetermined period of time has elapsed after receiving the command indicating that the variable winning means has changed from the second state to the first state (for example, the main board 11 Start counting the timer value for a predetermined period from the timing of receiving the command for specifying the opening of the big winning mouth sent from the side, etc.),
You may do so.

According to such a configuration, since the predetermined period is preferably counted and a specific display is performed when a prize is won within the predetermined period, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game without making the player feel uneasy.

(5) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (4) above,
The variable winning means guides the game medium to the winning path by being in the first state (for example, by opening the big winning opening door, allowing the launched game ball to pass through the first path). and a second path leading the game medium to the discharge path by being in the second state (for example, by closing the big winning opening door, the shot game ball and a detection means (for example, count switch 23 etc.) and
The time from the path forming means to the detecting means for the game medium is within the predetermined period (for example, the special variable winning ball device 7 is configured to detect the game ball existing in the large winning opening door portion by the count switch 23). is configured to be 0.6 seconds or less, which is a predetermined period, etc.),
You may do so.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to increase the possibility that the game ball existing above the big winning hole is detected within a predetermined period of time after the opening of the big winning hole, so that the game can be enjoyed without making the player feel uneasy. A decrease can be prevented.

(6) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (5) above,
After being controlled to the advantageous state and before the variable winning means enters the first state, an operation prompting display for prompting the player to operate is performed (for example, after a big win, the big winning port is opened). until it becomes, display to the player that he should hit to the right by performing a right hitting effect as shown in FIG. 10-7 (a-3), etc.),
You may do so.

According to such a configuration, since the operation to be performed during the advantageous state is suggested, the game method can be easily recognized, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

(7) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (6) above,
The first state is a state in which the variable winning door included in the variable winning means is completely opened (for example, the open state of the big winning opening means that the big winning opening is in a completely open state, That is, it is a state in which the big winning opening door has moved to a position where it is completely open, and the main board 11 is changed in response to detecting that the big winning opening door has moved to a position where it is completely open. (e.g., a specified command is sent from the side while the big prize mouth is open),
You may do so.

According to such a configuration, since the predetermined period is counted after the big winning opening is completely opened, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game without making the player feel uneasy.

(8) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (7) above,
Before the first round game in the advantageous state is started, when the game medium shot by the operation prompting display is performed wins the variable winning means, the specified Display a display (for example, a game ball fired by performing a right-handed effect before the start of the 1st round can win a prize at the timing when the big prize opening is opened, and a prize can be won within the predetermined period If you do, display the number of acquisitions as a specific display after a predetermined period, etc.),
You may do so.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the game media shot before the start of the round game from being wasted.

(9) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (8) above,
In the last round game of the plurality of round games in the advantageous state, the advantageous state is held while the game medium is sandwiched when the variable winning means changes from the first state to the second state. Ended (for example, in the final round, the 11th game ball was caught in the special variable winning ball device 7 (more specifically, between the big winning door and the glass door frame 3a) as shown in FIGS. 10-15 Jackpot game state ends while still in the state, etc.),
The sandwiched game medium wins the variable winning means by changing the variable winning means from the second state to the first state in the first round game when controlled again to the advantageous state. In this case, the specific display is displayed after the predetermined period has elapsed (for example, when the game ball enters the big winning opening at the start of the 1st R when the next big hit occurs, and the number of acquisitions as the specific display after the predetermined period has elapsed display, etc.),
You may do so.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent dissatisfaction felt by the player when an irregular event occurs.

(10) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (9) above,
During the time when the variable winning means is controlled to be in the advantageous state and the variable winning means changes from the second state to the first state, it is possible to execute a suggestive effect suggesting that the control is in the advantageous state (for example, a big winning During the period from the closed state to the open state of the mouth, it is possible to execute a fanfare effect suggesting that a jackpot game state has occurred, etc.), which is executed at the same time as the start of display of the given amount display after the elapse of the predetermined period. It is possible to execute a round game display that can specify the round game that is being played and a production during the round corresponding to the round game (for example, after a predetermined period of time has passed after the large winning opening is opened, the number of wins is displayed and the number of rounds is displayed. , and it is possible to execute a jackpot production corresponding to a round game, etc.),

According to such a configuration, it is possible to sharpen the presentation and improve the game interest.

(Explanation of means related to characteristic part 043AK)
Characteristic part 042AK includes the following characteristic part 043AK.
(1) The game machine according to the characteristic part 043AK is
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1, etc.) that can be controlled in an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player,
Display means (for example, the effect control CPU 120 that instructs the display content to the image display device 5, etc.),
Variable winning means (e.g., special variable winning ball device 7) capable of changing between a first state in which the game medium is easy to win and a second state in which the game medium cannot or is difficult to win,
Control means (for example, A CPU 103 etc. that performs a round game) and
The display means is
It is possible to display a given amount display related to the given amount of game value given when the game medium wins to the variable winning means (for example, display the number of wins),
When the first round game is played out of the plurality of round games, the given amount display is displayed after a predetermined period of time after the variable winning means changes from the second state to the first state. (For example, in the first round, display the number of wins after a predetermined period of time has passed after the big prize opening is opened),
If the game medium does not win the variable prize winning means within the predetermined period, a predetermined display corresponding to the fact that the game value is not given is displayed as the display of the amount to be given after the predetermined period has elapsed (for example, the number of wins). display "0000" as a display, etc.),
When the game medium wins the variable winning means within the predetermined period, a specific display different from the predetermined display is displayed as the display of the amount to be awarded after the predetermined period (for example, "0015" is displayed as the display of the winning number). etc.),
light-emitting means (for example, a production effect lamp 9, etc.);
A light emission control means (for example, effect control CPU 120 etc.) for controlling the light emission means is further provided,
The light emission control means determines whether the game medium has won a prize when the game medium has won the variable prize-winning means after the predetermined period of time has passed, or when the game medium has won the variable prize-winning means before the predetermined period has passed. (for example, when a game ball wins a prize in a large winning hole, the attacker lamp 9c emits light regardless of whether the prize is won within a predetermined period, etc.),
It is characterized by

According to such a configuration, when a prize is won within the predetermined period, the specific display is performed, so that it is possible to prevent a decline in the interest in the game without giving the player a sense of unease, and also to prevent the player from losing interest in the game, even if the prize is won within the predetermined period. becomes easier to see.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above,
The light emitting means includes a specific light emitting means (for example, an attacker lamp 9c) located near the variable winning means that emits light when a game medium wins in the variable winning means, and a predetermined light emitting means other than the specific light emitting means ( For example, production effect lamps 9 other than attacker lamps 9c, etc.)
The light emission of the specific light emitting means when the game medium wins the variable winning means has a higher number of light emissions per unit time than the light emission of the predetermined light emitting means (for example, the light emission of the attacker lamp 9c in the processing of step 042AKS058 (step 042AKS064) is emitted in a mode (a mode for notifying that a prize has been won) that is greater than the number of times of light emission per unit time of the game effect lamps 9 other than the attacker lamp 9c that emits light during the jackpot effect, etc.),
You may do so.

According to this configuration, it is easy to visually recognize that the game ball has entered the big winning hole, and the game interest can be improved.

(3) In the gaming machine described in (1) or (2) above,
further comprising sound output means (for example, speakers 8L, 8R, etc.),
The sound output means is
outputting a winning sound corresponding to the winning when the game medium wins the variable winning means;
When the game medium wins the variable winning means after the predetermined period of time has passed, and when the game medium wins the variable winning means before the predetermined period of time has passed, the winning sound is output (for example, the game When the ball wins, a winning sound is output regardless of whether the winning is within a predetermined period, etc.),
You may do so.

According to this configuration, it is easy to recognize that the game ball has entered the big winning hole, and the game interest can be improved.

(Description of means related to characteristic part 044AK)
Characteristic portion 042AK includes the following characteristic portion 044AK.
(1) The game machine according to the characteristic part 044AK is
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1, etc.) that can be controlled in an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player,
Display means (for example, the effect control CPU 120 that instructs the display content to the image display device 5, etc.),
Variable winning means (e.g., special variable winning ball device 7) capable of changing between a first state in which the game medium is easy to win and a second state in which the game medium cannot or is difficult to win,
Control means (for example, A CPU 103 etc. that performs a round game) and
The display means is
It is possible to display a given amount display related to the given amount of game value given when the game medium wins to the variable winning means (for example, display the number of wins),
It is possible to display a round game display that can identify the round game being executed (for example, display the number of rounds, etc.),
When the first round game out of the plurality of round games is performed, after a predetermined period of time has elapsed after the variable prize winning means has changed from the second state to the first state, the awarded amount display and the first round game are performed. display the round game display corresponding to the round game (for example, in the first round, display the number of rounds and the number of wins after a predetermined period of time has elapsed after the large winning opening is opened),
When the round game after the second round among a plurality of the round games is performed, after the predetermined period of time after the variable winning means changes from the second state to the first state, the second and subsequent rounds display the round game display corresponding to the round game (for example, in the second round, display the number of rounds after a predetermined period of time has elapsed after the large winning opening is opened),
If the game medium does not win the variable prize winning means within the predetermined period, a predetermined display corresponding to the fact that the game value is not given is displayed as the display of the amount to be given after the predetermined period has elapsed (for example, the number of wins). display "0000" as a display, etc.),
If the game medium wins the variable prize winning means within the predetermined period, a specific display different from the predetermined display is displayed as the display of the awarded amount after the predetermined period (for example, "0015" is displayed as the display of the winning number). etc.),
It is characterized by

According to this configuration, when a prize is won within a predetermined period, the specific display is performed, so that it is possible to prevent a decline in the interest in the game without giving the player a sense of unease. , it is possible to increase the possibility of winning the game balls continuously shot to the big winning opening opened earlier than the round display.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above,
If the game medium does not win the variable winning means within a predetermined period after the variable winning means changes from the second state to the first state when the round game for the second time or later is performed , continue to display the award amount display that was displayed in the previous round game (for example, when the round game after the second round is performed, within a predetermined period after the big winning port is opened 10-14 (a-31), continue to display the number of wins displayed in the previous round game, etc.),
When the game medium wins the variable winning means within a predetermined period after the variable winning means changes from the second state to the first state when the round game for the second time or later is performed , the amount displayed in the previous round game is added to the amount displayed in accordance with the gaming value that was provided in response to the winning (for example, if the game medium does not become available within a predetermined period of time). When the player wins the big prize, as shown in FIG. 10-14 (a-30), the number of wins displayed in the previous round game is changed to the won ball given in response to the win. such as adding and displaying numbers),
You may do so.

According to this configuration, it is possible to easily recognize the winning of the big winning opening even in the second and subsequent round games.

(3) In the gaming machine described in (1) or (2) above,
The display means is capable of updating and displaying the display of the award amount being displayed in accordance with the winning of the game medium in the variable winning means,
The update display of the awarded amount display is finished until the variable winning means once changes from the first state to the second state and then returns to the first state (for example, when the big winning opening is completely closed). After that, the count-up display and display of the number of wins corresponding to the over-winning will be completed within the period until the open state corresponding to the 2nd R),
You may do so.

According to this configuration, the update of the winning number display at the time of one opening does not overlap with the update of the winning number display at the time of the next opening, so it becomes easy to determine which opening corresponds to the win. .

(Description of means related to characteristic part 045AK)
The characteristic part 042AK includes the following characteristic part 045AK.
(1) The game machine according to the characteristic part 045AK is
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1, etc.) that can be controlled in an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player,
Display means (for example, the effect control CPU 120 that instructs the display content to the image display device 5, etc.),
Variable winning means (e.g., special variable winning ball device 7) capable of changing between a first state in which the game medium is easy to win and a second state in which the game medium cannot or is difficult to win,
Control means (for example, A CPU 103 etc. that performs a round game) and
The display means is
It is possible to display a given amount display related to the given amount of game value given when the game medium wins to the variable winning means (for example, display the number of wins),
When the first round game is played out of the plurality of round games, the given amount display is displayed after a predetermined period of time after the variable winning means changes from the second state to the first state. (For example, in the first round, display the number of wins after a predetermined period of time has passed after the big prize opening is opened),
If the game medium does not win the variable prize winning means within the predetermined period, a predetermined display corresponding to the fact that the game value is not given is displayed as the display of the amount to be given after the predetermined period has elapsed (for example, the number of wins). display "0000" as a display, etc.),
When the game medium wins the variable winning means within the predetermined period, a specific display different from the predetermined display is displayed as the display of the amount to be awarded after the predetermined period (for example, "0015" is displayed as the display of the winning number). etc.),
a plurality of light-emitting means (for example, production effect lamps 9, etc.);
A light emission control means (for example, effect control CPU 120 etc.) for controlling the light emission means is further provided,
The light emission control means is configured such that the variable winning means is in the first state when the variable winning means is in the first state and the awarded amount display after the predetermined period has elapsed is displayed. Control is performed to emit more light from the light emitting means than when the display of the applied amount before the predetermined period has elapsed (for example, during a predetermined period, that is, in a situation where the number of acquisitions is not displayed, the As shown in 10(c-18), the attacker lamp 9c only lights up when the game ball enters the big winning hole. For example, as shown in FIGS. 10-11 (c-20) and (c-21), the production effect lamp 9 provided on the multi-game machine frame 3 and the production effect lamp 9 provided on the game board 2 lighting alternately, and lighting more production effect lamps 9 than during a predetermined period, etc.),
It is characterized by

According to such a configuration, since a specific display is performed when a prize is won within a predetermined period of time, it is possible to prevent a decline in interest in the game without giving the player a sense of unease, and display the number of winnings after the predetermined period of time. It is possible to liven up the production after the is performed and improve the amusement of the game.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above,
After being controlled to the advantageous state and before the variable winning means enters the first state, an operation prompting display for prompting the player to perform an operation can be displayed (for example, displaying a right-handed display);
The light emitting means includes a specific light emitting means (for example, an attacker lamp 9c) located near the variable winning means that emits light when a game medium wins in the variable winning means, and a predetermined light emitting means other than the specific light emitting means ( For example, production effect lamps 9 other than attacker lamps 9c, etc.)
When the variable prize-winning means is in the first state, the specific light-emitting means is caused to emit light when the display of the awarded amount before the elapse of the predetermined period is not displayed, and the predetermined light-emitting means corresponds to the operation prompting display. Light is emitted in a light emission pattern, and when the given amount display after the lapse of the predetermined period is displayed, the specific light emission means and the predetermined light emission means are caused to emit light in a light emission pattern corresponding to the round game (for example, the big winning opening is After the opening, until a predetermined period elapses, as shown in FIGS. After a predetermined period of time has elapsed, for example, as shown in FIGS. When the effect lamps 9 are lit alternately and the effect lamps 9 are sequentially lit after the big winning hole is opened to suggest a right-handed shot, after the attacker lamp 9c that is lit last is lit, As shown in 10-9 (c-15), do not turn off the light and keep it in the lighted state, etc.),
You may do so.

According to this configuration, the operation can be promoted by using the predetermined light emitting means, and the player can be made aware that the variable prize winning means is in the first state.

(3) In the gaming machine described in (1) or (2) above,
In the round game, when a specific number of game media wins, one round game ends, and the next round game starts (for example, when 10 game balls win, the big winning port is opened. (e.g., the maximum period that can be
The time from the lapse of the predetermined period until the variable winning means is in the second state is a sufficient time for the game media to win the specific number is a sufficient period of time even if counted after a predetermined period of time has passed for 10 game balls to win a prize, etc.),
You may do so.

According to this configuration, it is possible to give the player a sense of security because a sufficient amount of time is guaranteed for winning.

(4) In the gaming machine described in (1) above,
In the round game, when a specific number of game media wins, one round game ends, and the next round game starts (for example, when 10 game balls win, the big winning port is opened. (e.g., the maximum period that can be
The time from the elapse of the predetermined period until the variable winning means is in the second state is a sufficient time for the game media to win the specific number of prizes (for example, the upper limit period for opening the big winning opening). is a sufficient period of time even if counted after a predetermined period of time has passed for 10 game balls to win a prize, etc.),
When the variable winning means is in the first state, light emission of the light emitting means is restricted when the display of the awarded amount before the lapse of the predetermined period of time is not displayed, and the display of the awarded amount after the lapse of the predetermined period of time is displayed. 10-9 (c-16) ~ (c-19 ), the production effect lamp 9 is not illuminated, and as shown in FIGS. light the lamp 9, etc.),
You may do so.

According to this configuration, it is possible to encourage the player to suppress the rapid shooting and promote the firing timing.

(5) In the gaming machine described in (4) above,
During the time when the variable winning means is controlled to be in the advantageous state and the variable winning means changes from the second state to the first state, it is possible to execute a suggestive effect suggesting that the control is in the advantageous state (for example, a fanfare effect). can be executed, etc.), along with the start of display of the given amount display after the lapse of the predetermined period, a round game display capable of specifying the round game being executed and an effect during the round corresponding to the round game can be executed. (For example, display the number of rounds, display the number of acquisitions, and perform the effect during the jackpot after a predetermined period of time),
The light emitting means is caused to emit light at the same timing as the execution timing of the production during the round (for example, as shown in FIGS. 10-11 (c-20) and (c-22), the timing similar to the execution timing of the production during the big hit to make the production effect lamp 9 emit light, etc.),
You may do so.

According to this configuration, at the timing when the mid-round production is executed, the production can be livened up at once, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

(6) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (5) above,
General winning means (for example, general winning port 10 etc.) that can win game media is further provided,
The display means is
It is possible to display the amount of game value imparted by winning a game medium to the general winning means as the indicator of the amount of impartation (for example, display the number of winnings corresponding to the winning of the general winning slot 10). etc.),
If the game medium does not win the general winning means within the predetermined period, a predetermined display corresponding to the fact that the game value is not given is displayed as the display of the amount to be given after the predetermined period has elapsed (for example, (e.g., displaying "0000" as a predetermined display indicating that no prize balls have been awarded when no game ball wins in the general prize winning opening 10),
When the game medium wins the general prize winning means within the predetermined period, display corresponding to the winning of the general prize winning means is performed as the display of the awarded amount after the predetermined period elapses (for example, the big prize opening is open). When a game ball wins in the general prize winning port 10 during a predetermined period after it becomes, after the lapse of the predetermined period, "0003" is displayed as the winning number display in response to the winning in the general prize winning port 10. etc.),
You may do so.

According to this configuration, since the display corresponding to the winning of the general winning means is also performed for the winning of the general winning means during the predetermined period, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uneasy.

(7) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (6) above,
The variable winning means is provided in a predetermined area in the game area (for example, the special variable winning ball device 7 is provided in the right game area),
The display means is
It is possible to display the first image (for example, a decorative pattern that constitutes a big hit) at the same timing as the display of the amount to be awarded,
The first image is displayed with an effect at the same timing as the display of the award amount during the advantageous state (for example, an effect display that activates a decorative pattern that constitutes a big win, etc.),
The effect display is displayed in a manner suggesting the predetermined area (for example, a decorative pattern constituting a big win is displayed as an effect display in a manner suggesting hitting to the right by moving in the right back direction, the front, and the left back direction. Such),
You may do so.

According to this configuration, the game area to be shot is suggested by the effect display, and the player can easily recognize the game area to be shot.

The present invention is not limited to what has been described above. In addition to the above-described embodiments and other examples of forms described later, the specific configuration is included in the present invention even if there are changes and additions within the scope of the present invention.

Further, among the configurations shown in the above-described embodiment and each modified example, and the configurations shown in later-described embodiment examples and each modified example, all or part of the configurations may be arbitrarily combined.

In addition, it should be considered that the above-mentioned embodiment disclosed this time and the below-mentioned form are examples in all respects, and are not restrictive. The scope of the present invention is indicated by the scope of the claims rather than the above description and the description below, and is intended to include all modifications within the scope and meaning equivalent to the scope of the claims.

The gaming machine of the present invention is also a gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1, etc.) that can be controlled in an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player,
Display means (for example, the effect control CPU 120 that instructs the display content to the image display device 5, etc.),
Variable winning means (e.g., special variable winning ball device 7) capable of changing between a first state in which the game medium is easy to win and a second state in which the game medium cannot or is difficult to win,
Control means (for example, A CPU 103 etc. that performs a round game) and
The display means is
It is possible to display a given amount display related to the given amount of game value given when the game medium wins to the variable winning means (for example, display the number of wins),
When the first round game is played out of the plurality of round games, the given amount display is displayed after a predetermined period of time after the variable winning means changes from the second state to the first state. (For example, in the first round, display the number of wins after a predetermined period of time has passed after the big prize opening is opened),
If the game medium does not win the variable prize winning means within the predetermined period, a predetermined display corresponding to the fact that the game value is not given is displayed as the display of the amount to be given after the predetermined period has elapsed (for example, the number of wins). display "0000" as a display, etc.),
If the game medium wins the variable winning means within the predetermined period, a special display different from the predetermined display is displayed as the display of the awarded amount after the lapse of the predetermined period (for example, "0015" is displayed as the number of wins). etc./In addition, special indications are sometimes called specific indications in the examples, but they have the same meaning.),
moreover,
A pending storage means (for example, a pending information storage area for effect control) capable of storing information related to variable display as pending information;
When controlled to the advantageous state, a notification effect (for example, continuous notification on hold) for notifying that the hold information corresponding to the control to the advantageous state is stored in the hold storage means can be executed. Production execution means (for example, step 010AKS004, production control CPU 120 that executes the processing of step 010AKS007),
Specific display means (for example, the effect control CPU 120 that executes the processing of step 010AKS007) capable of displaying a specific display when the notification effect is executed;
At a predetermined timing (for example, timing TA, TB, or TC) of the variable display corresponding to the specific display, erasing effect execution means (for example, step 010AKS024, step 010AKS024, etc.) capable of executing a specific display erasing effect (for example, erasing effect) for erasing the specific display Effect control CPU 120) that executes the processing of step 010AKS025),
If the specific display is not erased at the predetermined timing due to the occurrence of a predetermined event (for example, a missing variation pattern command or an error in the erasing effect setting process) while the specific display is being displayed, the specific display is not erased at the predetermined timing. A game machine that can execute special control (for example, can execute the process of step 010AKS045) to erase the specific display at a later specific timing (for example, timing TD) can be mentioned.
According to this feature, since a special display is performed when a prize is won within a predetermined period of time, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game without giving the player a sense of unease. Furthermore, according to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling distrustful of the player due to the continuous display of the specific display, and it is possible to suitably execute the notification effect.

That is, after a predetermined period of time has elapsed after the variable winning means changes from the second state to the first state, a predetermined display (if no prize is won within a predetermined period) or a special display (if a prize is not won within a predetermined period) or If the case) is displayed, the awarded amount is preferably displayed to prevent a decrease in the interest in the game, and when the specific display is displayed, the specific display is not erased at a predetermined timing that should be erased. Even in such a case, the specific display is erased at a specific timing after that, so it is possible to prevent the player from feeling distrustful of the player because the specific display continues to be displayed. In other words, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that easily attracts the interest of the players when installed in the gaming arcade and easily gains the trust of the players.

Also, the display of the amount to be given and the notification effect may be associated with each other. For example, when it is notified that the game is controlled to be in an advantageous state by the notification effect, the grant amount that can be obtained in two times of the advantageous state may be displayed. By doing so, the point that a large amount of grant can be obtained can be aroused, and interest is improved.

Furthermore, as another example of a gaming machine that can improve interest, a gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a big win game state, a small win game state) for the player (for example, a pachinko game related to the characteristic part 010AK) A game machine 1),
A pending storage means (for example, a pending information storage area for effect control) capable of storing information related to variable display as pending information;
When controlled to the advantageous state, a notification effect (for example, continuous notification on hold) for notifying that the hold information corresponding to the control to the advantageous state is stored in the hold storage means can be executed. Production execution means (for example, step 010AKS004, production control CPU 120 that executes the processing of step 010AKS007),
Specific display means (for example, the effect control CPU 120 that executes the processing of step 010AKS007) capable of displaying a specific display when the notification effect is executed;
At a predetermined timing (for example, timing TA, TB, or TC) of the variable display corresponding to the specific display, erasing effect execution means (for example, step 010AKS024, step 010AKS024, etc.) capable of executing a specific display erasing effect (for example, erasing effect) for erasing the specific display Effect control CPU 120) that executes the processing of step 010AKS025),
If the specific display is not erased at the predetermined timing due to the occurrence of a predetermined event (for example, a missing variation pattern command or an error in the erasing effect setting process) while the specific display is being displayed, the specific display is not erased at the predetermined timing. A game machine that can execute special control (for example, can execute the process of step 010AKS045) to erase the specific display at a later specific timing (for example, timing TD) can be mentioned. The form example of this gaming machine will be described below as another form example.

(another form example)
(Major operations of the main substrate 11)
First, main operations in the main board 11 will be described. When power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is activated, and the CPU 103 executes the game control main process. FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing game control main processing executed by the CPU 103 on the main substrate 11. As shown in FIG.

In the game control main process shown in FIG. 11, the CPU 103 first sets interrupt prohibition (step S901). Subsequently, necessary initial settings are performed (step S902). Initial settings include stack pointer setting, internal device register setting (CTC (counter/timer circuit), parallel input/output port, etc.), setting to make RAM 102 accessible, and the like.

Next, it is determined whether or not the output signal from the clear switch is on (step S903). The clear switch is mounted, for example, on the power board. When the clear switch is turned on and the power is turned on, an output signal (clear signal) is input to the game control microcomputer 100 through the input port. If the output signal from the clear switch is ON (step S903; Yes), initialization processing (step S908) is executed. In the initialization processing, the CPU 103 performs RAM clear processing for clearing flags, counters, and buffers stored in the RAM 102, and sets initial values in the work area.

Moreover, CPU103 transmits the production|presentation control command which instruct|indicates initialization to the production|presentation control board 12 (step S909). When the effect control CPU 120 receives the effect control command, for example, the image display device 5 displays a screen for notifying that the control of the gaming machine has been initialized.

If the output signal from the clear switch is not ON (step S903; No), it is determined whether backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (backup RAM) (step S904). When the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped due to an unexpected power failure or the like (power failure), the CPU 103 executes the power supply stop processing immediately before the pachinko game machine 1 becomes inoperable due to the stoppage of the power supply. In this process when the power supply is stopped, a process of turning on a backup flag indicating that data is to be backed up in the RAM 102, a data protection process of the RAM 102, and the like are executed. Data protection processing includes adding an error detection code (checksum, parity bit, etc.) and backing up various data. The data to be backed up includes not only various data (including various flags, states of various timers, etc.) for progressing the game, but also the states of the backup flags and error detection codes. In step S904, it is determined whether or not the backup flag is ON. If the backup flag is off and backup data is not stored in the RAM 102 (step S904; No), initialization processing (step S908) is executed.

If backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (step S904; Yes), the CPU 103 checks the backed up data (using an error detection code) and determines whether the data is normal (step S904; Yes). S905). In step S905, for example, it is determined whether or not the data in the RAM 102 matches the data when the power supply was stopped, using a parity bit or a checksum. If it is determined that they match, it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal.

If it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is not normal (step S905; No), the internal state cannot be returned to the state when the power supply was stopped, so initialization processing (step S908) is executed.

When it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal (step S905; Yes), the CPU 103 performs recovery processing (step S906) to return the internal state of the main board 11 to the state when the power supply was stopped. In the recovery process, the CPU 103 sets the work area based on the contents stored in the RAM 102 (the contents of the backed up data). As a result, the game state at the time of stopping the power supply is restored, and when the special symbols are fluctuating, the fluctuation of the special symbols is resumed from the state before restoration by executing the game control timer interrupt process described later. will be

And CPU103 transmits the production|presentation control command which instruct|indicates restoration from a power failure to the production|presentation control board 12 (step S907). In accordance with this, an effect control command that specifies the game state before the power outage that is backed up, and if the special game is being executed, the effect control that specifies the display result of the special game that is being executed You may make it transmit a command. These commands can use the same commands as the commands set for transmission in the special symbol process described later. When the effect control CPU 120 receives the effect control command specifying the restoration time from the power failure, for example, the image display device 5 notifies that the power failure has been restored or is being restored from the power failure. Display the screen for The effect control CPU 120 may perform appropriate screen display based on the effect control command.

After completing the recovery process or the initialization process and transmitting the effect control command to the effect control board 12, the CPU 103 executes the random number circuit setting process for initializing the random number circuit 104 (step S9010). Then, a predetermined time (for example, 2ms) so that the timer interrupt is periodically applied to the game control microcomputer 100 built-in CTC register setting (step S9011), interrupt is permitted (step S9012 ). After that, loop processing is entered. Thereafter, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 at predetermined time intervals (for example, 2 ms), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute timer interrupt processing.

FIG. 12-1 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the characteristic portion 152F. In the pachinko game machine 1 in the characteristic part 152F, the same reference numerals and explanations as those in the front view of the pachinko game machine 1 shown in FIG. 1 are omitted, and different parts will be explained.

In the game area where the hit game ball can flow down, the first path of the downflow path for the game ball is mainly provided in the area on the left side of the image display device 5 when viewed from the front, and the game is played. A second route, which is different from the first route, is mainly provided in a region on the right side of the image display device 5 as viewed from the front.

Hitting a game ball into the left area (left game area) of the image display device 5 in order to cause the game ball to flow down the first path is called left hitting. Hitting a game ball into the right area (right game area) of the image display device 5 in order to cause the game ball to flow down the second path is called right hitting. The first path may be called a left-handed path because it is a path that allows the game ball to flow down by striking the game ball to the left side of the game area. Also, the second path may be called a right-handed path because it is a path that allows the game ball to flow down by striking the game ball to the right side of the game area.

Note that the first route and the second route may be composed of different routes, or may be a route in which a part is shared. The left game area and the right game area may be separated by, for example, the end face of the image display device 5 and the arrangement of the game nails in the game area.

The game ball fired from the ball shooting device in response to the operation of the ball operating handle 30 and hit into the game area is guided to the left game area along, for example, the arrangement of the game nails. As a result, it becomes impossible or difficult to guide to the right game area. In addition, when the game ball is guided to the right game area, it becomes impossible or difficult to guide it to the left game area by being guided along the arrangement of the game nails, for example.

A winning ball device 6A having a first starting winning hole is provided as a structure into which game balls hit in the left game area of the game areas can enter. The winning ball device 6A is arranged below the image display device 5 . The winning ball device 6A is provided with a first starting opening switch 22A for detecting a game ball that has entered the first starting winning opening.

A passage gate 41, a variable winning ball device 6B, and a V judgment winning device 87 are provided as structures into which game balls hit into the right game region of the game regions can enter. The variable winning ball device 6B has a second starting winning hole in which game balls can win. In addition, as switches for detecting game balls that have entered the respective passage gates 41, there is a gate switch 21 inside the passage gate 41, a second start opening switch 22B inside the second start winning opening, and a V judgment winning device 87. A V winning switch 87a, a V determination winning switch 15a, and a V determination discharge switch 15b are provided inside.

In the left game area, a game nail is planted so that a game ball is guided to the first starting prize winning opening of the winning prize opening structure. Therefore, when aiming to enter the game ball into the first start winning hole, the player can hit the game ball to the left. Also, in the right game area, game nails are planted so that game balls are guided to the second start winning opening and the passing gate 41 among the winning opening structures. Therefore, when aiming for the game ball to enter the second starting prize-winning opening and the passage gate 41, the player can hit the game ball to the right.

The passage gate 41 is a gate structure into which a game ball can enter (pass). When the game ball passes through the passage gate 41, normal symbols are variably displayed. The normal pattern will be described later. In the left game area, a game nail is planted so that a game ball is guided to the first starting prize winning opening of the winning prize opening structure. Therefore, when aiming to enter the game ball into the first start winning hole, the player can hit the game ball to the left. Also, in the right game area, game nails are planted so that game balls are guided to the second start winning opening and the passing gate 41 among the winning opening structures. Therefore, when aiming for the game ball to enter the second starting prize-winning opening and the passage gate 41, the player can hit the game ball to the right.

The V judgment winning device 87 is a device for judging V winning of a game ball, which is a condition for generating a big hit when a small hit occurs.

The V-judgment winning device 87 is made of a transparent member, and a state in which a game ball passes through it can be visually recognized. The V-judgment winning device 87 is provided with a width that allows game balls to pass in the front-rear direction at the top, and walls are formed on both sides (front side and back side) of a passage that is inclined from right to left and extends in the left-right direction. A part is provided, and a guide path along which game balls are guided is formed. In the central part of the guide, when a small hit is made, a predetermined period (for example, 0.1 seconds × 10 times open period + 1 second closed period (interval period) × 9 times + 1 second end period) By repeating opening and closing, an operation opening is formed as an opening that allows a total of about 10 or more game balls to win within a predetermined period of time during which the opening is open. In the path of the game ball in the V judgment winning device 87, a plurality of protrusions as deceleration means for decelerating the game ball to be guided are provided on both sides of the wall portion in a manner that alternately protrudes, so that when hitting to the right A structure (hereinafter referred to as deceleration structure) is formed in which the game balls slowly flow through the passage above the operation opening of the upper portion of the V judgment winning device 87 .

In the small hit game state, the V judgment winning device 87 is operated for a relatively long period of time until it is detected that 10 game balls have entered the V judgment winning device 87, or until a predetermined period of time elapses. Opening control is executed. In the V-judgment winning device 87 , the portion of the guideway where the operating opening is not formed forms a fixed passage called a fixed portion 873 . A movable portion 872 capable of moving back and forth over the operating port is provided at a position where the operating port can be opened and closed.

The movable portion 872 is driven by the solenoid 22 and can move forward and backward to open and close the operation port. In the state where the operation port is closed by the state of the movable part 872, the game ball can pass through the upper surfaces of the movable part 872 and the fixed part 873 as a guide path, and is guided from the right end to the left end on the guide path and falls from the left end. do. When the operating port is opened by the operating state of the movable portion 872, the operating port is opened in the guideway, so that the game ball guided to the guideway can drop from the operating port into the V judgment winning device 87. Become.

Inside the V judgment prize winning device 87 (actuation opening), a V prize winning region 870 as a specific region is located at the center of the bottom of the V judgment prize winning device 87 in the horizontal direction as a prize winning region in which a game ball entering from the operation opening can win. Further, an inclined path is provided to guide all the game balls entered from the operation opening onto the V winning area 870 by an inclined path. The V winning area 870 has a V winning opening into which a game ball can enter, and can guide downward the gaming ball entering from the V winning opening.

At the uppermost end of the winning opening (V winning opening) of the V winning area 870, a plate-like opening/closing member (not shown) that can switch the V winning area 870 between an open state and a closed state is provided. there is The opening/closing member is driven by a solenoid 24, and can move forward and backward to open and close the V winning opening. When the V winning opening is opened by the state of the opening/closing member, the game ball guided onto the V winning area 870 can drop into the V winning area 870 . On the other hand, in the state where the V winning opening is closed by the state of the opening/closing member, the game ball guided onto the V winning area 870 passes over the opening/closing member and opens near the downstream side of the V winning area 870. , and can fall into a winning ball area (not shown) that can guide the game downward.

Specifically, the V winning area 870 of the V determination winning device 87 is basically in an open state. When the game ball enters the V winning area 870 and wins, the game ball is detected by the V winning switch 87 a provided in the V winning area 870 . In the small winning game state, when one game ball is detected by the V winning prize switch 87a, the opening/closing member is controlled to the closed state, and the game ball guided onto the V winning prize area 870 after that is within the winning ball area. will enter the A game ball that has entered the winning ball area is detected by the V determination winning switch 15a provided in the winning ball area. As a result, one game ball entering the V judgment prize winning device 87 is detected by the V judgment prize switch 87a, and the subsequent game balls are detected by the V judgment prize prize switch 15a.

When the total number of balls detected by the V winning switch 87a and the V determination winning switch 15a reaches 10, the operation opening of the V judgment winning device 87 opened in the small winning game state is closed, and the game ball enters. made impossible. The V winning area 870 and the winning ball area are configured to merge in the lower part, and a game ball that has entered the V determination winning device 87 through the merged discharge passage is discharged into a predetermined area inside the game board 2. It is discharged to the discharge channel. The discharge passage is provided with a V judgment discharge switch 15b capable of detecting discharged game balls, and all the discharged game balls are detected by the switch.

When a small hit occurs and the operation port of the V judgment prize winning device 87 is opened, the game ball enters the V prize winning region 870 and is detected by the V winning prize switch 87a during a predetermined effective period. , the conditions for generating a big hit are established, and the game is controlled to a big-hit game state. Winning of a game ball to such a V winning area 870 is called V winning. In the pachinko game machine 1, during the period in which a small hit occurs and the operation opening of the V judgment prize winning device 87 is opened as described above, a total of about 10 game balls are produced on average without requiring any special operation. can enter the V-judgment winning device 87, and furthermore, when a game ball can enter the V-judgment winning device 87, the game ball will surely (100%) enter the V winning area It is structurally designed to enter the 870. In addition, in the pachinko game machine 1, when a small hit occurs, right-hand hitting promotion notification is executed to instruct right-hand hitting so that the player can easily hit the game ball into the V judgment winning device 87. be.

Therefore, when a small hit occurs, except when the player does not shoot the game ball during the opening period of the operation opening of the V judgment winning device 87 and when the player hits to the left, it is possible to hit to the right. In this case, the game ball will surely (100%) enter the V winning area 870 and a big hit will occur.

In addition, in this embodiment, an example in which the V-judgment winning device 87 is provided with a game ball deceleration structure is shown. However, such a deceleration structure is not provided, and an operation opening that allows the game ball to fall is provided in a part of the guide path of the game ball in the V judgment winning device 87, and during the period of the small winning game state In order to allow about 10 game balls to enter the V winning area 870, a configuration may be used in which the operation opening is opened 10 times.

In the right game area, a game nail is planted so that a game ball is guided to the variable winning ball device 6B and the V determination winning device 87.例文帳に追加Therefore, when aiming to make the game ball enter the variable winning ball device 6B and the V determination winning device 87, the player can hit the game ball to the right.

It should be noted that there is a possibility that a game ball hit into the left game area may enter either the variable winning ball device 6B or the V judgment winning device 87. It is desirable that the possibility is extremely low compared to the possibility that a game ball hit into the right game area will enter them.

A special variable winning ball device 7 is provided below the game area. In the special variable winning ball device 7, a game ball hit to the right is guided by a game nail planted in the right game area. Also, the special variable winning ball device 7 is configured so that the game ball does not enter from the left game area depending on the state of the game nail being planted.

The special variable winning ball device 7 has a large winning opening whose front is covered with a rectangular door, and when a big hit occurs, the solenoid tilts the door forward about the bottom side to reveal the big winning opening ( opening). Inside the special variable winning ball device 7, a count switch 23 is provided for detecting entering game balls. To the special variable winning ball device 7, a winning route is defined by a game nail or other structures so that a game ball can enter the big winning opening only when the game ball is hit in the right game area. Limited. It should be noted that even if the game ball is struck in either the left game area or the right game area, it may be possible to win the big prize opening.

The big hit is when the big win pattern (big hit display result) is derived and displayed on the first special pattern display device 4A, and when the big win pattern (big win display result) is derived and displayed on the second special pattern display device 4B. occurs in When a big win is determined by a lottery based on the winning of a game ball in the first starting winning hole, a big win pattern is derived and displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A. When a big win is determined by a lottery based on the winning of a game ball in the second starting winning hole, a big win pattern is derived and displayed on the second special pattern display device 4B.

A big hit is also generated when a game ball entered while the operation opening of the V judgment prize device 87 is open due to the small win game state entering the V prize area 870. - 特許庁Hereinafter, when a game ball enters the V winning area 870 and is detected by the V winning switch 87a, this is referred to as V winning. A small win is a win in which the operation port of the V judgment winning device 87 is opened as a predetermined value, and a big win can occur on the condition of V winning. In the V judgment winning device 87, a game state in which the operation opening is opened is called a "small hit game state". Then, in the small win game state, a big win generated based on the fact that the game ball wins V is called a "big win via a small win". On the other hand, a big hit game state based on the display result of the variable display of the special symbols by the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B is called "big hit by special symbol".

The jackpot game state is a specific game state (advantageous state) advantageous to the player as a given value, and the special variable winning ball device 7 repeats the open state and the closed state for a predetermined number of times. In the repeat continuation control, the state in which the special variable winning ball device 7 is open (the big winning opening is open) is called a round. Repeat continuation control is also called round control.

In the jackpot game state, after the special variable winning ball device 7 is in the open state, a predetermined condition for terminating the open state (a predetermined period of time (for example, 29 seconds) has elapsed in the open state, or a predetermined number (for example, 10 The closed state is established in response to the establishment of the opening end condition that the winning ball of 1) has been generated. Then, when the opening end condition is established, the continuation right is generated, and the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened again. The generation of the continuation right is repeated until the number of openings in the jackpot game state reaches 15 rounds (final round), which is a predetermined upper limit value.

In the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, the first starting condition (first execution condition) or the second starting condition (second execution condition), which is the execution condition of the variable display, is established (for example, the game ball is After passing (including winning) the first start winning opening or the second starting winning opening as the starting winning area, the condition for starting the variable display (for example, the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is The game is started based on establishment of a state of non-execution and non-execution of a jackpot game, and after a fluctuation display time (variation time) elapses, a display result (stop pattern) is derived and displayed. It should be noted that the passage of the game ball means that the game ball has passed through a predetermined winning area such as a winning opening or a gate, and the concept includes the game ball entering (winning) the winning opening. is. Further, deriving and displaying the display result means finally stopping display (determined display) of the pattern (an example of the identification information).

In addition, regarding the variable display in which the start condition is not satisfied even though the game ball has entered the starting area such as the first start winning opening and the second starting winning opening, it is still started within the range of the predetermined upper limit number. Storing information about variable displays for which the conditions are not met is called pending storage. The term "reserved storage" is also used to indicate (specify) information that has been retained. A pending memory is also called a starting memory or a starting winning memory.

As for the first special symbol, the variable display is executed based on the first reserved memory as the reserved memory based on the entry of the game ball into the first start winning opening. As for the second special symbol, the variable display is executed based on the second reserved memory as the reserved memory based on the entry of the game ball into the second start winning opening. When a big win occurs in a state where such a first reserve memory or a second reserve memory exists, the reserve memory that existed before the occurrence of the big win is maintained as it is, and a variable display is performed after the end of the jackpot game state. used for

When the second start winning to the second start winning opening occurs, even if there is a pending memory of the first start winning, the variable display of the second special symbol based on the second starting winning is preferentially executed. be. Thus, the variable display of the second special symbol is executed with priority over the variable display of the first special symbol.

Above the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, a second reserve consisting of four displays for displaying the number of valid winning balls entering the second start winning opening, that is, the number of second reserve memories. A display 25B is provided. The second holding indicator 25B increases the number of indicators lit up by 1 each time there is a valid start winning. Then, every time the variable display on the second special symbol display device 4B is started, the number of indicators to be lit is reduced by one.

Further above the second reservation display 25B, there is provided a first reservation display 25A consisting of four displays for displaying the number of valid winning balls that have entered the first start winning opening, that is, the first reservation memory number. . The first pending indicator 25A increases the number of indicator lights by 1 each time there is a valid start winning. Then, every time the variable display on the first special symbol display device 4A is started, the number of indicators to be lit is reduced by one.

In the pachinko game machine 1, depending on the game situation, the player shoots the game balls so as to selectively use "left shot" aiming at the left game area and "right shot" aiming at the right game area. A game state and a performance state are controlled so that a rich game can be enjoyed. The flow of the game after the player starts playing in the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described below.

When the player takes a seat in the pachinko game machine 1 and starts the game for the first time, the player first plays the game so that the game ball wins the first start winning hole by striking to the left. Then, the variable display of the first special symbol is executed, and if the display result is a big hit (big hit by the special symbol), the left-hand shot is switched to the right-hand shot, and the game is played aiming at the special variable winning ball device 7 which is opened. . After the jackpot game state is over, right-handed promotion notification is performed on the screen of the image display device 5 to prompt the player to play the game by right-handed. Specifically, a message such as “Aim right” is displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 .

During the jackpot game state, a game is played aiming at the opened special variable winning ball device 7 by striking to the right. During the jackpot game state, right-handed promotion notification is performed. After the jackpot game state is over, the game is continued by hitting to the right when the later-described time-saving state is reached. After the jackpot game is finished, if the time saving state is set, the time saving notification for notifying that the time saving state is started is performed on the screen of the image display device 5.例文帳に追加In addition, during the time saving state, right-handed promotion information is also performed. If the time-saving state does not occur after the end of the jackpot game state, the right-hand hit is switched to the left-hand hit by the end of the right-handed promotion notification executed during the jackpot game state, and the game ball wins the first start prize-winning port. Play games like this. In addition, when the time saving state does not occur, left-handed promotion notification (also called left-handed notification) is performed on the screen of the image display device 5 to prompt the player to return to left handed and play the game. may

During the time-saving state after the end of the jackpot game, the game is performed aiming at the variable winning ball device 6B having the second starting winning hole by striking to the right. When the game ball enters the second start winning hole and the display result is a big win (a big win by a special symbol), the game is played aiming at the special variable winning ball device 7 while striking to the right. Also, if the game ball wins in the second start winning opening and the display result becomes a small winning display result, the operation opening of the V judgment winning device 87 is opened in the small winning game state, so V judgment is made while striking to the right. A game is played aiming at the winning device 87 . At the start of the small-hit game state, a small-hit start notification is provided on the screen of the image display device 5 to notify the start of the small-hit game state. In addition, when it is controlled to the small hit game state, the start timing of the small hit display executed before the operation opening of the V judgment winning device 87 is opened according to the game situation (depending on the game situation) , or at a predetermined timing before the execution of the small hit display), the right hitting promotion notification is also performed.

When the operation opening of the V judgment prize winning device 87 is in the open state due to the small hit game state, the game ball falls from the operation opening into the V judgment prize winning device 87, enters the V prize winning area 870 and is detected, When a V prize is generated, a big win is generated via a small win. When the V winning occurs, the V winning notification for notifying that the V winning has occurred is performed on the screen of the image display device 5. - 特許庁Further, when the small-hit game state ends, a small-hit end notification for notifying that the small-hit game state has ended is performed on the screen of the image display device 5 . After the end of the small win, a big win game state is entered and the special variable winning ball device 7 is released, so the player plays the game aiming at the special variable winning ball device 7 while striking to the right.

Further, when a game is played aiming at the V judgment winning device 87 in the small winning game state, if the game ball does not enter the V winning area 870 and enters a non-specific area other than the V winning area 870, a big win is performed. does not occur. Thus, when V winning is not generated during the small winning game state, V winning failure notification is performed on the screen of the image display device 5 to notify that the V winning has failed. Further, at the end of the small winning game state, a small winning end notification is performed on the screen of the image display device 5 to notify that the small winning game state has ended. After the end of the small winning game state, when the time saving state continues, the player continues to play the game aiming at the variable winning ball device 6B while striking to the right. When the time-saving state ends, the game is played so that the game ball wins in the first start prize-winning hole by switching from right-hand hitting to left-hand hitting. At the end of the time-saving state, a time-saving end notification for notifying that the time-saving is completed on the screen of the image display device 5 and a left-handed promotion notification for urging the player to return to left-handed and play the game are performed.

FIG. 12-2 is a diagram showing a hit type table. The winning type table shows, for each winning type, conditions for occurrence of a big win, a control state (game state) after a big win, the number of openings (number of rounds) in a big win, and the opening time of each round in a big win. In this embodiment, as the jackpot types, the pattern 15R short-time big hit, the pattern 4R short-time big hit, the small hit via 16 (15) R short-time big hit, the small hit 9 (8) R short-time big hit, and the small hit 5 (4) ) R time-saving jackpot is provided. The number in parentheses of the big hit via the small hit indicates the number of times the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened.

A small hit occurs when a game ball enters a second start winning hole provided in the variable winning ball device 6B and the display result of the second special symbol becomes a small winning symbol. Determination as to whether or not the display result of the special symbol is to be a small winning symbol is performed in advance by a random number lottery (small winning determination of the special symbol). When a small win occurs, a small win game state is entered, and the operation port of the V judgment winning device 87 is opened with an opening pattern of 10 opening times and 0.1 second opening time. The game control state after the end of the small hit game state (big hit probability, small hit probability, base, which will be described later) is the same as before the small hit. In the small win, a prize ball is paid out to the game ball that has won the V prize area 870 in the V judgment prize winning device 87 during the small win game state. During the small winning game state, it is set that about 10 winning balls can be generated, and it is set that about 30 winning balls can be paid out according to the winning balls.

When the operation port of the V determination prize winning device 87 is open, the game ball is entered into the operation port, and the game ball enters the V prize area 870 inside the V determination prize winning device 87 (V winning), a big hit occurs. do. A big win via such a small win is called a big win via a small win. Jackpots via small hits include 16 (15) R-time short jackpots via small hits, 9 (8) R-time short jackpots via small hits, and 5 (4) R-short time jackpots via small hits with different numbers of rounds in the jackpot. be A small hit that is linked so as to be a 16 (15) R time-saving jackpot is called a first small win. 9 (8) The small hit that is linked to be the R time-saving jackpot is called the second small hit. 5 (4) The small hit that is linked to be the R time-saving jackpot is called the third small win.

On the other hand, a big hit that is generated directly by a variable display of special symbols without going through a small win is called a big hit in design. The symbol jackpot includes a symbol 15R time-saving jackpot and a symbol 4R time-saving jackpot, which are generated directly based on the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol.

In this way, the big wins are the symbol big win directly generated based on the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, and the V winning via the small winning based on the variable display of the second special symbol. It includes a big hit via a small hit. Each of the symbol jackpot and the jackpot via the jackpot is a jackpot that is controlled to a time-saving state after the jackpot game state ends, and is called a time-saving jackpot. The advantageous state advantageous to the player in this embodiment also includes the opening of the special variable winning ball device 7 .

The pattern 15R time-saving jackpot is a jackpot in which the jackpot is opened 15 times (15R). The pattern 4R time-saving jackpot is a jackpot in which the big prize opening is opened four times (4R). In the 16 (15) R time-saving jackpot via small hit, after the V judgment prize winning device 87 is opened once (0.1 seconds x 10 times), the big prize opening is opened 15 times (15R) under the condition of V winning. The prize winning device is opened for 16 rounds, but the number of openings of the big prize opening is actually 15 times, and the player can win the same big hit as the pattern 15R short time jackpot with regard to opening the big prize opening. I feel categorical. 9 (8) R time-saving jackpot via small jackpot is a jackpot in which the big jackpot is opened 8 times (8R) under the condition of V prize after the V judgment prize winning device 87 is opened (0.1 seconds x 10 times). is. In the 5 (4) R time-saving jackpot via small hit, after the V judgment prize winning device 87 is opened once (0.1 seconds x 10 times), the big prize opening is opened 4 times (4R) under the condition of V winning. The prize winning device is opened for 5 rounds, but the number of times the big prize opening is actually opened is 4, and the player can get the same big hit as the pattern 4R short time jackpot with regard to the opening of the big prize opening. I feel categorical.

The time-saving state after the symbol 4R time-saving big hit is the end condition that the number of times of variation display of the second special symbol is 1, and the end condition that the total number of times of variation display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is 5 times. Two end states are set for . The number of times of the time-saving end condition that the number of times of variable display of the second special symbol is 1 is considered that the game ball entering the V judgment winning device 87 enters the V winning area 870 at a rate of 100%. is set as In the variable display of the second special symbol, a small hit occurs at a rate of about 1/7. Therefore, the termination condition that the number of fluctuation display times of the second special symbol is 1 time, when the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is executed, at a rate of about 1/7, there is a possibility of generating a big hit via a small hit. is a certain number of times.

The number of times of the time-saving end condition that the number of times of variable display of the second special symbol is once is set for the following reasons. In the case of the symbol 4R time-saving jackpot, basically, the time-saving state (including electric power supply state) is continued until the variable display of the second special symbol is completed once, but in order to variably display the second special symbol, It is necessary to make the game ball enter the passage gate 41 by striking to the right to open the variable winning ball device 6B, and to make the game ball win the variable winning ball device 6B in that state, such a variable winning ball device. It may take a long time to win the game ball to 6B, and the first special symbol retained and stored may be variably displayed first.

Therefore, the end condition that the total number of fluctuation display times of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is five times is a big hit immediately after the start of the time saving state and before the fluctuation display start condition of the second special symbol is satisfied. Even if the variable display of the first special symbol is started by the reserved memory based on the first start winning, which can be stored up to four before the game state, one of the second special symbols which is likely to be determined as a big win advantageous to the player. This is a condition for ensuring that the variable display for batches can be executed. By doing so, the variable display of the first special symbol by the reserved memory based on the first start winning is started immediately after the start of the time saving state, so that in the time saving state, it is likely to be determined to be an advantageous big hit for the player. It is possible to prevent the variable display of the second special symbol from being stopped.

After the big hit other than the 4R time-saving big hit, the end condition is that the number of times the second special symbol is displayed is seven times, and the end condition is that the total number of times the first special symbol and the second special symbol are displayed is 11 times. Two end states are set for . Such a number of 7 times of the end condition of the time-saving state is set in consideration of the fact that game balls entering the V judgment winning device 87 enter the V winning area 870 at a rate of 100%. In the variable display of the second special symbol, a small hit occurs at a rate of about 1/7. Therefore, the end condition that the number of times of variable display of the second special symbol is 7 times, when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed, compared to the symbol 4R short time big hit, there is a possibility of generating a big hit via a small hit. is the number of times that is significantly higher. As a result, the player can be made to pay attention to the occurrence of the big win via the small win, and the player's expectation for the occurrence of the big win via the small win can be enhanced.

In addition, the end condition that the total number of fluctuation display times of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is 11 times is a big hit immediately after the start of the time saving state and before the fluctuation display start condition of the second special symbol is satisfied. Even if the variable display of the first special symbol is started by the reserved memory based on the first start prize which can be stored up to four before the game state, 7 of the second special symbol which is likely to be determined as a big win advantageous to the player. This is to ensure that the variable display of the variable number of times can be executed. By doing so, the variable display of the first special symbol by the reserved memory based on the first start prize is started immediately after the start of the time saving state, so that it is easy to determine a big win advantageous to the player in the time saving state. It is possible to prevent the number of fluctuations of the second special symbol from decreasing.

In this embodiment, in the low base state, which is the normal state, the first start winning port is provided so that the game ball can win from the first path. This is more advantageous for the player in terms of starting winnings than when the game ball flows down the path. On the other hand, in an advantageous state such as a jackpot game state, the special variable winning ball device 7 that is opened is provided so as to be able to win a prize from the second path. It is more advantageous for the player in terms of winning a prize at the time of a big hit than when the game ball flows down. In addition, in a specific state such as a small winning game state, the V judgment winning device 87 that is opened is provided so as to be able to win from the second path, so that the game ball flowing down the second path is more likely to flow down the first path. This is more advantageous for the player in terms of the occurrence of a big hit than when the game ball flows down.

It should be noted that the comparison of advantages is not limited to this. and the second path, and in the low base state as the normal state, the first path is easier to win the variable winning slot than the second path, and the high base state, the big win game state, and the small In other states such as a winning game state, the second route is more likely to win the variable winning slot than the first route. A configuration may be adopted in which it is advantageous for the player to flow down, and in other game states, it is advantageous for the player to have the game medium flow down the second path.

FIG. 12-3 is an explanatory diagram showing each random number. FIG. 12-3 shows the random number type, update range, application, and addition conditions. Each random number is used as follows.

(1) Random R: A random counter for determining whether or not to give a big hit and whether or not to give a small win. The random 1 is updated by 1 at 10 MHz, updated from 0 to 65535 which is the upper limit, and then updated from 0 again. (2) Random 1: Type of jackpot (type, pattern 15R short-time jackpot, pattern 4R short-time jackpot, via small hit 16 (15) R short-time jackpot, via small hit 9 (8) R short-time jackpot, and via small hit 5 (4) Any type of R time-saving jackpot) and a jackpot pattern are determined (for jackpot type determination, jackpot pattern determination). (3) Random 2: Determine the type (type) of the variation pattern (for determining the type of variation pattern). (4) Random 3: Determine the variation pattern (variation time) (for variation pattern determination). (5) Random 4: Determine whether or not to generate a hit based on the normal design (for normal design hit determination). (6) Random 5: Determine the initial value of Random 5 (for determining the initial value of Random 5).

In this embodiment, the big hits in the specific game state are a symbol 15R short time big hit, a symbol 4R short time big hit, a small win via a 16 (15) R short time big hit, a small win via a 9 (8) R short time big hit, and a small hit. A plurality of types of Via 5 (4) R time-saving jackpots are included. Therefore, when it is determined to be a big hit based on the value of the random number for judging the hit (random R), or when it is determined to be a small hit, based on the value of the random number for judging the big hit type (random 1) Then, the type of jackpot is determined to be one of these jackpot types. However, in the case of a big win via a small win, the decided big win becomes invalid unless a V winning occurs. Furthermore, when the jackpot type is determined, the jackpot pattern is also determined based on the value of the jackpot type determination random number (random 1). Therefore, the random number 1 is also the random number for determining the jackpot symbol. Also, when it is determined to be the type of the small hit, the design of the small hit is determined at the same time. Therefore, random 1 is also a small winning symbol determination random number.

In addition, the variation pattern first determines the variation pattern type using the random number for determining the variation pattern type (random 2), and uses the random number for determining the variation pattern (random 3), any included in the determined variation pattern type Determine the variation pattern. As such, in this embodiment, a variation pattern is determined by a two-stage lottery process. The variation pattern type is obtained by grouping a plurality of variation patterns according to the characteristics of the variation mode. One or more variation patterns belong to the variation pattern type.

In this embodiment, the fluctuation pattern is classified into a normal fluctuation pattern type that is a fluctuation pattern type without reach and a reach fluctuation pattern type that is a fluctuation pattern type with reach.

FIG. 12-4 is an explanatory diagram showing a first special figure per determination table, a second special figure per determination table, and various big hit type determination tables. These tables are stored in the ROM 101. FIG.

FIG. 12-4(A) is an explanatory diagram showing the first special figure hit determination table. The first special symbol winning judgment table is a data table for making a big winning judgment with respect to the first special symbol, and is a table in which a big winning judgment value to be compared with the random R is set. "Probability" shown in FIG. 12-4(A) indicates the probability (percentage) of winning a big hit.

The jackpot probability of the first special symbol differs according to the set value. Setting 1 is 1/199, setting 2 is 1/190, setting 3 is 1/180, setting 4 is 1/170, setting 5 is 1/160, and setting 6 is 1/150. Therefore, the big hit probability is high in the order of setting 1<setting 2<setting 3<setting 4<setting 5<setting 6.

FIG. 12-4(B) is an explanatory diagram showing the second special figure hit determination table. The second special hit determination table is a data table for judging a big hit and a small hit with respect to the second special symbol, and is set with a big hit determination value and a small hit determination value to be compared with the random R. It is a table with The upper stage in FIG. 12-4(B) is the big hit determination table portion, and the lower stage in FIG. 12-4(B) is the small hit determination table portion. The “probability” shown in the upper part of FIG. 12-4(B) indicates the probability (ratio) of getting a big hit, and the “probability” shown in the lower part of FIG. 12-4(B) shows the probability (ratio) of getting a small hit. .

The jackpot probability of the second special symbol differs according to the set value. Setting 1 is 1/199, setting 2 is 1/190, setting 3 is 1/180, setting 4 is 1/170, setting 5 is 1/160, and setting 6 is 1/150. Therefore, the big hit probability is high in the order of setting 1<setting 2<setting 3<setting 4<setting 5<setting 6. On the other hand, the small hit probability of the second special symbol is set to 1/7.35 regardless of the set value. In addition, you may provide a small hit in the 1st special design. In such a case, it is desirable that the probability of winning a small hit is lower for the first special symbol than for the second special symbol. For example, the small hit probability of the first special symbol may be set to 1/100.

When the CPU 103 detects the starting winning to the first starting winning opening (first starting winning) or the starting winning to the second starting winning opening (second starting winning), the random number circuit 124 is activated at a predetermined timing. is extracted (random R). As for the first start prize, the extracted value is compared with the big hit judgment value set in the first special prize judgment table, and when the extracted value matches one of the big hit judgment values, a big hit is given with respect to the first special pattern. to decide. As for the second start prize, the extracted value is compared with the big hit judgment value set in the second special prize judgment table, and when the extracted value matches any one of the big hit judgment values, the second special pattern is given a big hit. to decide. Then, when the extracted value does not match any of the big hit determination values, the extracted value is compared with the small hit determination value set in the second special hit determination table, and the extracted value matches any of the small hit determination values. If they match, it is decided to make a small win with respect to the second special symbol. Determining to make a small win also means making a provisional decision to make a big win via a small win (because it is not controlled as a big win unless a V winning occurs during a small win, it is described as a temporary decision). .

Determining whether or not to make a big hit means determining whether or not to shift to the big win game state. It is also about deciding whether to do it or not. Determining whether or not to make a small win means determining whether or not to shift to a small winning game state. It is also about deciding whether or not.

12-4 (C), (D), and (E) are explanatory diagrams showing the big hit type determination table stored in the ROM 101. FIG. FIG. 12-4(C) is a first special symbol jackpot type determination table used for determining the jackpot type of the symbol jackpot when the first special symbol is determined to be a jackpot. FIG. 12-4(D) is a second special symbol jackpot type determination table used for determining the jackpot type of the symbol jackpot when the second special symbol is determined to be a jackpot.

In the first special figure big hit type determination table of FIG. 12-4 (C), the numerical value to be compared with the random 2 value for judging the big hit type, "symbol 15R short time big hit" and "symbol 4R short time big hit" A big hit determination value corresponding to each of the and is set. In the second special symbol jackpot type determination table of FIG. 12-4(D), a jackpot determination value corresponding to the “symbol 15R time-saving jackpot”, which is a numerical value to be compared with the value of random 1, is set.

In addition, as shown in FIGS. 12-4 (C) and (D), the jackpot type determination value is also used as a decision value (jackpot pattern determination value) for determining the jackpot pattern of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. be done. For example, the determination value corresponding to the "8R short-time jackpot" is also set as the determination value corresponding to the jackpot symbol "3". The determination value corresponding to the "15R time-saving big hit" is also set as the determination value corresponding to the big hit symbol "7".

Using such various jackpot type determination tables, the CPU 103 determines the type corresponding to the jackpot type determination value with which the value of random 1 matches as the jackpot type, and the value of random 1 matches as the jackpot pattern. Determine the jackpot pattern. As a result, the jackpot type and the jackpot pattern corresponding to the jackpot type are determined at the same time.

In the small hit via big hit type determination table of FIG. 12-4 (E), the numerical value to be compared with the random 2 value for judging the big hit type, "16 (15) R time short jackpot via small hit" and " A big hit determination value corresponding to each of "9 (8) R short time big hit via small hit" and "5 (4) R short time big hit via small hit" is set. However, the jackpot types determined by the jackpot via jackpot type determination table are the first jackpot (16 (15) R time short jackpot) and the second jackpot (9 (8) R time short jackpot). , is a temporary jackpot type linked to each of the third jackpots (5 (4) R short-time jackpots), and is invalid if V winning does not occur in the jackpot game state.

12-5 and 12-6 are explanatory diagrams showing an example of the content of the effect control command transmitted by the game control microcomputer 100. FIG. FIG. 12-5 and FIG. 12-6 show the relationship between the specific command data for the effect control command, the command name, and the designated content of the command. In the game control microcomputer 100, as shown in FIGS. 12-5 and 12-6, various effect control commands are transmitted to the effect control CPU 120 according to the game control state.

Main commands will be explained with reference to FIGS. 12-5 and 12-6. The command 80XX(H) is an effect control command (variation pattern command) specifying a variation pattern to be variably displayed on the image display device 5 corresponding to the variable display of the special symbol (each corresponding to the variation pattern XX). When a unique number is assigned to each of a plurality of variation patterns, there is a variation pattern command corresponding to each variation pattern specified by that number. "(H)" indicates a hexadecimal number. Moreover, the production control command specifying the variation pattern is also a command for specifying the start of variation. Therefore, when the command 80XX(H) is received, the effect control CPU 120 controls the effect display device to start the effect corresponding to the variable display of the special symbols.

Commands 8C01 (H) to 8C06 (H) are display result specifying commands that indicate display results including loss display results, big hit types, big hit display results for each small hit type, and small hit display results.

Command 8D01 (H) is a first symbol variation designation command indicating to start variable display of the first special symbol. Command 8D02 (H) is a second symbol variation designation command indicating to start variable display of the second special symbol. The command 8F00(H) is a symbol confirmation designation command for designating the end of the variation of the first and second special symbols.

Commands A001 to A005 (H) are hit start designation commands for designating the start of the jackpot gaming state for each jackpot type.

Command A1XX(H) is a special prize opening designation command indicating that the special prize opening is being opened for the number of times (round) indicated by XX. A2XX(H) is a post-opening big winning hole designation command indicating after opening (closing) the big winning hole for the number of times (round) indicated by XX.

Commands A301 to A305 (H) are hit end designation commands for designating the end of the jackpot gaming state for each jackpot type.

Command A401 (H) is a first start prize designation command that designates that there has been a first start prize. Command A402 (H) is a second start prize designation command that designates that there has been a second start prize.

Command B000 (H) is a normal state designation command that designates that the game state is the normal state (low base state). Command B001 (H) is a first time saving state designation command that designates that the gaming state is the first time saving state (high base state). Command B002 (H) is a second time saving state designation command that designates that the gaming state is the second time saving state (high base state).

Command C0XX(H) is a first reserved storage number designation command that designates the first reserved storage number. "XX" in command C0XX(H) indicates the first reserved storage number. Command C1XX(H) is a second reserved storage quantity designation command for designating a second reserved storage quantity. "XX" in the command C0XX(H) indicates the second reserved storage number.

In addition, in this embodiment, the game control microcomputer 100, when subtracting the number of reserved memories, transmits a reserved memory number designation command that designates the number of reserved memories after subtraction, but not limited to this, For each of the first reserved memory count and the second reserved memory count, a reserved memory count subtraction designation command may be used that designates subtraction of 1 from the reserved memory count.

Command C2XX (H) and command C3XX (H) are the contents of the judgment result at the time of winning such as jackpot judgment, jackpot type judgment, variation pattern type judgment at the time of start winning to the first start winning mouth or second start winning mouth It is a production control command shown. Among them, the command C2XX(H) is a symbol designating command indicating whether or not a big win will occur, whether or not a small win will occur, and the determination result of the type of the big win among the winning determination results. In addition, the command C3XX (H) is a variation type command indicating the determination result (variation pattern type determination result) of the determination value range of the variation pattern type determination random number value among the winning determination results is.

The command C401 (H) is a command designating the start of the first small hit. The command C402(H) is a command designating the start of the second small hit. The command C403 (H) is a command designating the start of the third small hit. The command C501 (H) is a command designating the start of the first small hit. Command C502 (H) is a command that designates the start of the second small hit. The command C503 (H) is a command designating the start of the third small hit. The command C601(H) is a V prize designation command that designates that there is a V prize. Command C602(H) is a V winning ball detection designation command that designates detection of winning balls (both V winning balls and winning balls other than V winning balls) to the V judgment winning device 87.

In the game control microcomputer 100, the RAM 102 is provided with a first pending storage buffer for storing the pending storage information of the first special symbol. In the first reserved storage buffer, a storage area corresponding to the upper limit value of the first reserved storage number (4 in this example) is secured. In the first reservation storage buffer, a hardware random number for judging a jackpot (random R), a random number for judging a jackpot type (random 1) which is a software random number, a random number for judging a variation pattern type (random 2), and , a random number for determining a variation pattern (random 3) is stored.

As for the second special symbol, the RAM 102 is provided with a second reserved storage buffer for storing the reserved storage information of the second special symbol. In the second reserved storage buffer, a storage area corresponding to the upper limit value of the second reserved storage number (4 in this example) is secured. In the second reservation storage buffer, a hardware random number for judging a jackpot (random R), a random number for judging a jackpot type (random 1) as a software random number, a random number for judging a variation pattern type (random 2), and , a random number for determining a variation pattern (random 3) is stored.

Based on the winning of the first start winning slot, the CPU 103 extracts random numbers from each of the random number circuit 124 and the random counter for generating software random numbers, and stores them in the storage area in the first reserved storage buffer. Execute the process to (store). Specifically, these random values are extracted and saved (stored) in the first reserved storage buffer based on the winning of the first start winning slot. In addition, based on the winning of the second start winning slot, the CPU 103 extracts random numbers from the random number circuit 124 and the random counter for generating software random numbers, and stores them in the storage area in the second reserve storage buffer. Executes the process of saving (storing) to Specifically, these random values are extracted and saved (stored) in the second reserve storage buffer based on the winning of the second start winning slot.

Such storage of information relating to starting winnings in the pending storage buffer may be referred to as "stored pending." In addition, the random number for determining the variation pattern type (random 2) and the random number for determining the variation pattern (random 3) are not extracted and stored in advance in the reservation storage buffer at the time of the start winning, but at the start of the variation of the special symbol. You may make it extract.

FIG. 12-7 is a flow chart showing the starting port switch passing process executed as part of the process of S101. In the starting port switch passage processing, the CPU 103 first confirms whether or not the first starting port switch 22A is in the ON state (S1211). If the first starting port switch 22A is not on, the process proceeds to S1221. If the first starting port switch 22A is in the ON state, the CPU 103 determines whether the number of first reserved memories has reached the upper limit value (specifically, the number of first reserved memories for counting the number of first reserved memories). whether the value of the number counter is 4) (S1212). If the first reserved storage number has reached the upper limit, the process proceeds to S1221.

If the first reserved memory number has not reached the upper limit, the CPU 103 increases the value of the first reserved memory number counter by 1 (S1213). Next, the CPU 103 extracts values from the random number circuit 124 and a counter for generating software random numbers, and executes processing for storing them in the save area in the first reserved storage buffer (S1214). In the process of S1214, the random number for judging the jackpot (random R), the random number for deciding the jackpot type (random 1), the random number for judging the fluctuation pattern type (random 2), and the random number for judging the fluctuation pattern (random 3) are extracted, Stored in the save area.

Next, the CPU 103 executes a prize-winning effect process for judging in advance the fluctuation display result and the fluctuation pattern type when the fluctuation based on the detected first special symbol starting prize is executed thereafter (S1215).

In this embodiment, after the starting winning to the first starting winning opening or the second starting winning opening occurs, and various data obtained at the time of the starting winning opening are stored as reserved storage information, the start condition for the variable display is When established, at the timing of starting the variable display, in the special symbol normal process (S110), based on the reserved storage information, the variable display result for the special symbol (first special symbol or second special symbol) to start the variable display is determined as a big hit display result and the big hit type is determined based on the big hit determination value and the big hit type determination value set corresponding to the various random numbers described above. Then, the determination of the variation pattern (including determination of the variation pattern type) in the variation pattern setting process (S111) is based on the variation pattern type determination value set corresponding to the various random values and the variation pattern determination value. based on

On the other hand, apart from such determination, the timing before the start of the variable display based on the starting winning to the first starting winning opening or the second starting winning opening, specifically, the game ball is the first starting winning opening Or at the timing of the start winning in the second start winning opening (the timing at which the retention memory information is stored), read ahead the retention memory information that stores the various data obtained at the time of the start winning, and based on the prefetched retention memory information Then, determination of whether or not a big win will occur, determination of whether or not a small win will occur, determination of the type of the big win, and determination of the type of variation pattern will be performed in advance according to the above-described various random numbers. Based on the determination value, the jackpot type determination value, and the variation pattern type determination value, a prize-winning effect process for prefetching determination is executed. By doing so, the performance control CPU 120 predicts the result of the variable display in advance before the variable display of the performance symbols is executed, and based on the various determination results at the time of the start winning, the variable display of the performance symbols. It is possible to execute a look-ahead effect such as a look-ahead notice that gives a notice of a big win (possibility of a big win) during the game.

Then, the CPU 103 performs control for transmitting the symbol designation command to the performance control CPU 120 based on the determination result of the performance processing at the time of winning (S1216), and performs control for transmitting the variation type command to the performance control CPU 120 (S1216). S1217). In addition, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit the first start winning designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (S1218), sets the value of the first reserved memory number counter to EXT data, and issues the first reserved memory number designation command. Control to transmit to the effect control CPU 120 is performed (S1219).

By executing the processing of S1216 and S1217, in this embodiment, the first Both the symbol designation command and the variation type command are surely transmitted to the effect control CPU 120 each time the start winning opening is started.

Further, in this embodiment, by executing the processing of S1216 to S1219, when the starting winning to the first starting winning opening occurs, the symbol designation command, the variation type command, the first starting winning designation command and A set of four commands of the first reserved storage number designation command is transmitted collectively within one timer interrupt.

Next, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the second starter switch 22B is on (S1221). If the second starter switch 22B is not on, the process is terminated. If the second starting port switch 22B is in the ON state, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the number of second reserved memories has reached the upper limit value (specifically, the number of second reserved memories for counting the number of second reserved memories). whether or not the value of the number counter is 4) (S1222). If the second reserved storage number has reached the upper limit, the process is terminated.

If the second reserved memory number has not reached the upper limit, the CPU 103 increases the value of the second reserved memory number counter by 1 (S1223). Next, the CPU 103 extracts values from the random number circuit 124 and the counter for generating software random numbers, and executes processing for storing them in the save area in the second reserved storage buffer (S1224). In the process of S1224, a random number for jackpot determination (random R), a random number for jackpot type determination (random 1), a variation pattern type determination random number (random 2), and a variation pattern determination random number (random 3) are extracted, Stored in the save area.

Next, the CPU 103 executes the winning effect processing similar to the winning effect processing described in S1215 for the detected starting winning of the second special symbol (S1225). Then, the CPU 103 performs control for transmitting the symbol designation command to the performance control CPU 120 based on the determination result of the performance processing at the time of winning (S1226), and performs control for transmitting the variation type command to the performance control CPU 120 (S1227). ). In addition, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit the second start winning designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (S1228), sets the value of the second reserved memory number counter to EXT data, and issues the second reserved memory number designation command. Control to transmit to the effect control CPU 120 is performed (S1229).

By executing the processing of S1226 and S1227, in this embodiment, the second Each time a start winning opening is entered, both a symbol designation command and a variation type command are surely transmitted to the effect control CPU 120.例文帳に追加

Also, in this embodiment, by executing the processing of S1226 to S1229, when the start winning to the second start winning opening occurs, the symbol designation command, the variation type command, the second start winning designation command and A set of four commands of the second reserved storage number designation command is transmitted collectively within one timer interrupt.

FIG. 12-8 is a flow chart showing a special symbol normal process (S110) in the special symbol process process. In the special symbol normal process, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not there is reserved storage data in the first reserved storage buffer or the second reserved storage buffer (S51). If there is no pending storage data in either the first pending storage buffer or the second pending storage buffer, the process ends.

If there is no pending storage data in the pending storage buffer in S51, the process (S80) for transmitting a customer waiting demonstration designation command is performed, and then the process is terminated. On the other hand, when there is reserved storage data in the first reserved storage buffer or the second reserved storage buffer in S51, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not there is reserved storage data in the second reserved storage buffer (S52). If there is pending storage data in the second pending storage buffer, the special symbol pointer (a flag indicating whether the special symbol process processing is being performed for the first special symbol or the special symbol process processing is being performed for the second special symbol) Data indicating "second" is set (S54). On the other hand, if there is no reserved storage data in the second reserved storage buffer, data indicating "first" is set in the special symbol pointer (S53).

In this embodiment, the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A, depending on whether data indicating "first" or "second" is set in the special symbol pointer. and the variable display of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display device 4B are performed using a common processing routine. When data indicating "first" is set in the special symbol pointer, the variable display of the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A is performed based on the reserved memory data stored in the first reserved memory buffer. will be On the other hand, when the data indicating "second" is set in the special symbol pointer, based on the reserved memory data stored in the second reserved memory buffer, the variable display of the second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 4B. is done.

By the control of S52 to S54, if there is even one data of the second reserved storage in the second reserved storage buffer, the variable display of the second special symbol display device 4B based on the data of the second reserved storage, Priority is given to the variable display of the first special symbol display device 4A based on the data of the first reserved storage.

Next, in RAM 102, CPU 103 reads each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the reserved memory number=1 indicated by the special symbol pointer and stores it in the reserved memory buffer of RAM 102 (S55). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the CPU 103 stores each random value stored in the saving area corresponding to the first reserved storage number=1 in the first reserved storage buffer is read out and stored in the random number buffer of RAM 102 . In addition, when the special symbol pointer indicates "second", the CPU 103 reads each random value stored in the saving area corresponding to the second reserved memory number=1 in the second reserved memory buffer. It stores in the random number buffer of RAM102.

Then, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the count value of the reserved storage number counter indicated by the special symbol pointer, and shifts the contents of each storage area (S56). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the count value of the first reserved storage number counter, and the number of storage areas in the first reserved storage buffer Shift content. Also, when the special symbol pointer indicates "second", 1 is subtracted from the count value of the second reserved storage number counter, and the contents of the save area in the second reserved storage buffer are erased.

That is, when the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the CPU 103, in the first reserved storage buffer of the RAM 102, saves the storage area corresponding to the first reserved storage number = n (n = 2, 3, 4) Each stored random value is stored in a storage area corresponding to the first reserved storage number=n−1. Also, when the special symbol pointer indicates the "second", stored in the storage area corresponding to the second reservation storage number = n (n = 2, 3, 4) in the second reservation storage buffer of the RAM 102 store each random value in the storage area corresponding to the second reserved storage number=n-1.

Therefore, the order in which each random number stored in each storage area corresponding to each first reserved memory number is extracted always matches the order of the first reserved memory number = 1, 2, 3, 4. It's like Also, the order in which the random numbers stored in the respective storage areas corresponding to the second reserved memory numbers are extracted always matches the order of the second reserved memory number=1, 2, 3, 4. It's like

Further, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit the reserved memory number designation command indicated by the special symbol pointer to the effect control CPU 120 based on the value of the reserved memory number counter indicated by the special symbol pointer after the subtraction (S59). ). In this case, when a value indicating "first" is set in the special symbol pointer, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit the first reserved memory number designation command. Further, when a value indicating "second" is set in the special symbol pointer, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit a second reserved memory number designation command.

In the special symbol normal process, first, data indicating "first" indicating that the process is performed for the first start winning opening, that is, "first" indicating that the process is performed for the first special symbol. or data indicating "second" indicating that the process is performed for the second start winning opening, i.e., data indicating "second" indicating that the process is performed for the second special symbol , is set to the special symbol pointer. Then, in the subsequent processes in the special symbol process process, the process corresponding to the data set in the special symbol pointer is executed. Therefore, it can be made common between the case of targeting the first special symbol and the case of targeting the second special symbol.

Next, the CPU 103 reads the random R (random number for judging a big hit) from the random number buffer, and executes the judging module (S61). In this case, the CPU 103 reads the random number for judging a big hit extracted in S1214 of the starting switch passing process or S1224 of the starting switch passing process and stored in the holding memory buffer or the random number buffer, and judges the big hit. The big-hit determination module is a program that compares a predetermined big-hit determination value or small-hit determination value with a random number for big-hit determination, and executes a process of determining a big-hit or a small-hit if they match. That is, it is a program for executing a process of judging a big hit or a process of judging a small hit.

In the big hit determination process, if the first special symbol matches one of the big hit determination values shown in FIG. 12-4 (A), the second special symbol will be one of the big hits shown in FIG. 12-4 (B) If it matches the judgment value, it is decided to make a big hit with respect to the special symbol. If it is determined to be a big hit (Y of S61), the process proceeds to S71. Determining whether or not to make a big hit means to decide whether or not to shift to a big win game state, but it also means to decide whether or not to make the stop pattern on the special pattern display device a big win pattern. .

If it is determined to be a big win in S61 (Y of S61), a big win flag indicating a big win is set (S71).

Next, it is determined whether or not the special symbol pointer indicates "first" (S72). When the special symbol pointer is "first", select the first special symbol big hit type determination table of FIG. 12-4 (C) (S73), and proceed to S75. On the other hand, if the special symbol pointer does not indicate "first" (if it indicates "second"), select the second special symbol jackpot type determination table of FIG. 12-4 (D) (S74). , S75.

In S75, using the jackpot type determination table selected in S73 or S74, the jackpot type corresponding to the value of the random number (random 1) for jackpot type determination stored in the random number buffer area is determined as the jackpot type. Determine (S75) and proceed to S81.

Also, if the value of the big hit determination random number (random R) does not match any of the big hit determination values in S61 (N in S61), the data set in the special symbol pointer is data indicating "second". By confirming whether or not there is, it is confirmed whether or not the big hit determination target is the variable display of the second special symbol (S76). When the data set in the special symbol pointer in S76 is not the data indicating the "second" (the variable display of the first special symbol), the process proceeds to S82 which will be described later. On the other hand, when the data set in the special symbol pointer in S76 is data indicating "second" (variation display of the second special symbol), the second special symbol in FIG. 12-4 (B) By using the determination table, it is determined whether or not the value of the big hit determination random number (random R) coincides with any of the small hit determination values, thereby performing small hit determination processing (S77). That is, when the value of the big hit determination random number (random R) matches one of the small hit determination values shown in FIG. do. Then, when it is determined to be a small hit (S77Y), a small hit flag indicating that it is a small hit is set (S78).

After setting the small hit flag, select the small hit via big hit type determination table of FIG. The jackpot type corresponding to the value that matches is determined as the jackpot via small hit type (S80). Then, the process proceeds to S81. On the other hand, if the value of the small hit determination random number (random R) does not match any of the small hit determination values in S77 (N in S77), the process proceeds to S82, which will be described later.

In S81, data indicating the type of jackpot determined in S75 or S80 is stored in the jackpot type buffer in RAM 102 (S81), and the process proceeds to S82. For example, when the jackpot type is "symbol 15R time-saving jackpot", "01" is set in the jackpot type buffer as data indicating the jackpot type, and when the jackpot type is "symbol 4R time-saving jackpot", data indicating the jackpot type. "02" is set in the jackpot type buffer as. On the other hand, when the jackpot type is "16 (15) R short-time jackpot via small jackpot", "03" is set in a temporary jackpot type buffer different from the jackpot type buffer as data indicating the jackpot type. When the jackpot type is the small hit via 9 (8) R time-saving jackpot, "04" is set in the temporary jackpot type buffer as data indicating the jackpot type. When the jackpot type is the small hit via 5 (4) R time-saving jackpot, "05" is set in the temporary jackpot type buffer as data indicating the jackpot type. Among these, the data indicating the 16 (15) R short-time jackpot via the small hit, the 9 (8) R short-time jackpot via the small hit, and the 5 (4) R short-time jackpot via the small hit are the V prizes in the small hit game state. There is data that will be invalid without the occurrence of a big hit if a is not generated, and is provisionally set.

In S82, a special symbol stop symbol is set (S78). Specifically, when neither the big-hit flag nor the small-hit flag is set, "-", which is a lost symbol, is set as the stop symbol of the special symbol. When the small hit flag is set, any one of "1", "5" and "9", which are the small hit patterns corresponding to the small hit type selected and determined in S80, is determined as the stop pattern of the special pattern. do. When the jackpot flag is set, either "3" or "7", which is a jackpot pattern corresponding to the jackpot type selected and determined in S75, is determined as the stop pattern of the special pattern. Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the variation pattern setting process (S111) (S79).

FIG. 12-9 is a flow chart showing the small hit opening pre-processing (S118). In the small hit opening preprocessing, the CPU 103 operates the movable portion 872 in an open state by controlling the solenoid 22 based on the small hit opening mode, and starts the opening operation of the operation opening of the V judgment winning device 87 ( S411). Next, the CPU 103 transmits a small-hit start designation command indicating that the small-hit game state is started to the effect control CPU 120 (S412). Next, the CPU 103 sets a V judging winning number counter as counting means in order to use the number of winnings to the V winning area 870 in the open state of the small win as a termination condition of the open state (S413). Specifically, in S413, the counter value of the V judgment winning number counter is set to "10", and the setting for down-counting the V winning number is performed. Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the small winning open process (S119) (S414).

FIG. 12-10 is a flow chart showing the small hit open process (S119) in the special symbol process process. In the small hit open process, the CPU 103 updates the small hit open control timer by subtracting -1 (S430). Next, in S435, which will be described later, it is confirmed whether or not the count value of the V judgment prize winning number counter for counting the number of V winning prizes is "0" (S431). The V determination winning ball number counter is set to "10" by S413 of FIG. 12-9, and when 10 V winning balls are counted, the count value becomes "0". When the count value of the V judgment winning number counter is "0" in S430, the process proceeds to S441. On the other hand, when the count value of the V judgment winning number counter is not "0" in S430, it is confirmed whether or not the small hit opening control timer has timed out (timer value = 0) (S432).

When the small hit opening control timer has timed out in S432, the process proceeds to S441. On the other hand, when the small hit open control timer has not timed out in S432, the movable part 872 is opened by controlling the solenoid 22 corresponding to the time value of the small hit open control timer based on the open mode of the small hit. A process for opening and closing the operating port of the V judgment winning device 87 is performed (S433).

Next, in order to determine whether or not the V prize generated by the game ball entering from the V prize opening into the V prize area 870 which is in the open state inside the V judgment prize winning device 87 is detected, the V prize is detected. It is determined whether or not the switch 87a is on (S434). When it is on in S434, it means that V winning is detected, and the V winning flag which is set when V winning is detected is set (S435). Then, a process for transmitting a V winning ball detection designation command is performed (S436). As a result, the effect control CPU 120 can recognize that the V winning balls have been detected, and can recognize the number of V winning balls. Next, the opening/closing member is operated by driving the solenoid to change the V winning opening of the V winning area 870 from the open state to the closed state (S437), and the process proceeds to S439. As a result, when the first game ball entering the V determination winning device 87 wins the V, the V winning opening of the V winning area 870 is closed, and then the game entering the V determination winning device 87 All the balls are guided to the winning ball area and detected by the V judgment winning switch 15a.

On the other hand, when it is not turned on in S434, it means that V winning is not detected, and it is determined whether or not the V determination winning switch 15a is turned on (S438). When it is on in S438, the process proceeds to S439, and when it is not on in S438, the process ends.

In S439, the count value of the V-judgment winning ball counter set to "10" in S413 of FIG. (S440). As a result, the effect control CPU 120 can recognize that the V winning ball that has entered the determination winning device 87 has been detected after the V winning ball has been detected, and the game that has entered the determination winning device 87 can be performed. It becomes possible to recognize the number of balls.

When the count value of the V judgment winning prize number counter is "0" in S431, it means that the opening end condition of the small prize is satisfied because the number of V winning prizes of the small prize reaches the upper limit value, and When the small-hit open control timer times out in S432, it is when the small-hit opening end condition is established due to the end of the small-hit open control. At these times, the CPU 103 controls the solenoid 22 to operate the movable portion 872 in a closed state, thereby closing the operation opening of the V judgment winning device 87 (S441). When the count value of the V-judgment winning number counter becomes "0", even if the V-judgment winning device 87 is in the middle of opening according to the mode of opening the small win, the count value of the V-judgment winning number counter becomes ``0''. The V judgment winning device 87 is forcibly closed. When the small hit open control timer times out, the V judgment winning device 87 is closed according to the end of the small hit open control in the small hit open mode.

Next, the data corresponding to the specific period which is the V winning valid period after closing the V judgment winning device 87 is set in the V winning valid period timer (S442), and the value of the special symbol process flag is set to the small winning end process ( S120) is updated (S443), and the process ends. As a result, the timing of the specific period, which is the V winning valid period after the closing of the V judgment winning device 87, is started. By setting the specific period as the V winning valid period in this way, even if the game ball passes through the V winning area for some reason later than the normal passing time, the game ball can be detected. In addition, since a specific period is set, even if there is a person who illegally attempts to win a prize in the V winning area, it is only detected during that period, so fraud can be prevented.

FIG. 12-11 is a flow chart showing small hit end processing (S120) in the special symbol process processing. In the process after the end of the small hit, the CPU 103 updates the V winning valid period timer by subtracting -1 (S441), and confirms whether or not the V winning valid period timer has timed out (timer value=0) (S442).

When the V winning validity period timer has not timed out in S442, it is determined whether or not the V winning flag, which is set in S434 or S445 when the V winning is already detected, is set (S443). If the V winning flag is set, the process is terminated. On the other hand, if the V winning flag is not set, the V winning switch 87a is operated to determine whether or not the V winning caused by the game ball entering the V winning area 870 during the V winning valid period is detected. is turned on (S444). If it is not turned on in S444, the process ends. On the other hand, when it is ON in S444, it means that V winning is detected during the V winning valid period, and a V winning flag indicating that V winning has been detected is set (S445). Then, a process for transmitting a V winning designation command is performed (S446), and the process is terminated. Thereby, the effect control CPU 120 can recognize that the V winning has occurred.

When the V winning valid period timer has timed out in S442, processing for transmitting a small hit end designation command is performed (S447). Thereby, the effect control CPU 120 can recognize that the small hit has ended. Next, by changing the state of the solenoid 22, control is performed to open the opening/closing member and restore the V winning area 870 (V winning opening) to the open state (S447A). Next, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the V winning flag is set (S448). If the V win flag is set in S448, it is determined that the game is a big win, and the big win flag is set (S449).

As described above, in the small winning game state, if the player hits to the right in accordance with the right-handed promotion notification, which will be described later, the game ball can enter the V judgment winning device 87 with a probability of approximately 100%, and the V judgment winning a prize. Since the game ball that has entered the device 87 always wins the V prize in the V prize area 870, the V prize flag is set with a probability of approximately 100% (S435 in FIG. 12-10). A jackpot flag is set and controlled to a jackpot game state.

Next, the CPU 103 stores the data indicating the jackpot type via the small win stored in the jackpot provisional type buffer in S81 in the jackpot type buffer in response to the fact that it is determined that the jackpot will be legally awarded due to the occurrence of the V prize. formally stored in (S450). Then, the time saving flag set at that time is once reset (S451).

Next, the CPU 103 transmits a jackpot start 3 designation command, a jackpot start 4 designation command, or a jackpot start 5 designation command according to the jackpot type corresponding to the data stored in S450 (S452). Thereby, the effect control CPU 120 can recognize that the jackpot game state starts. Next, a value corresponding to the big win display time (for example, the time for notifying the occurrence of the big win on the image display device 5) is set in the big winning hole control timer (S453).

In addition, referring to the jackpot opening pattern data stored in the ROM 101, depending on the jackpot type, the number of times of opening (eg, 15 times, 8 times, or 4 times), opening time (eg, 29 seconds), interval The opening pattern data indicating the opening mode such as the time (the closing time of the big winning opening between rounds) is set in a predetermined storage area formed in the RAM 102 (S454). Of these data, the number of times of opening is set in an opening number counter for counting the number of times of opening. Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the big hit opening pre-processing (S114) (S455), and the processing is terminated. As a result, when V winning occurs in the small winning game state, the state is shifted to the big winning game state.

If the V winning flag is not set in S448, the big win game state does not occur, so the data indicating the big win via the small win stored in the big win provisional type buffer in S81 is erased (S456), and the special symbol process flag is set. The value is updated to a value corresponding to the special symbol normal process (S110) (S457), and the process is terminated. As a result, when the V prize does not occur in the small winning game state, the game does not shift to the big winning game state.

FIG. 12-12 is a display screen diagram showing an example of the notification effect. As shown in FIG. 12-12(a), in the ending period during the big win game, a notification effect is executed to notify that the pending information regarding the win (big win or small win) is stored in the pending storage buffer. A suggestive image 152F001 is displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 as a suggestive effect suggesting. The suggestive image 152F001 displayed as the suggestive effect is a V-shaped effect image suggesting that the notifying effect of the holding group by the display of "V" will be executed thereafter.

The notification effect executed after the suggestive effect includes a first mode notification effect and a second mode notification effect. The notification effect according to the first mode is an effect in which a small white "V" is displayed. Also, the notification effect according to the second mode is an effect in which a large red "V" is displayed. Also, the number after the "V" indicates the number of wins in the pending storage buffer. For example, "Vx1" indicates 1 or more wins in the pending storage buffer, "Vx2" indicates 2 or more wins in the pending storage buffer, and "Vx3" indicates It indicates that there are 3 or more hits in the pending storage buffer, and "Vx4" indicates that there are 4 hits in the pending storage buffer. A number after the "V" may indicate that there are more wins in the pending storage buffer than are displayed. For example, "Vx1" may be displayed even if there are 2-3 hits instead of one.

From the state of FIG. 12-12(a), when the notification effect is not executed, the ending image is shown as shown in FIG. 12-12(b). On the other hand, FIG. 12-12(c) shows a case where the notification effect according to the first mode is executed from the state of FIG. 12-12(a). As shown in FIG. 12-12(c), a first mode image 152F002 with a small white "V" is displayed as the notification effect of the first mode. In FIG. 12-12(c), it is "V×1", indicating that there is one or more hits in the pending storage buffer.

FIG. 12-12(d) shows a case in which the notification effect in the second mode is executed from the state of FIG. 12-12(a). As shown in FIG. 12-12(d), a second mode image 152F003 with a large red "V" is displayed as the notification effect of the second mode. In FIG. 12-12(d), "V×3" indicates that there are three or more hits in the pending storage buffer.

FIGS. 12-13 are explanatory diagrams showing an information effect execution/non-execution determination table, an information effect content determination table, a V mode determination table, a winning suggestive effect execution determination table, and a non-hit suggestive effect execution determination table. FIG. 12-13(A) is a notification effect execution presence/absence determination table for determining whether or not to execute the notification effect. As shown in FIG. 12-13(A), whether or not to execute the notification effect is determined at different ratios depending on the set value. Specifically, in setting 1, execution of notification effect is determined to be 35% and no execution of notification effect is determined to be 65%. In setting 3, execution of notification effect is determined to be 45% and non-execution of notification effect is determined to be 55%. In setting 4, execution of notification effect is determined to be 50% and non-execution of notification effect is determined to be 50%. In setting 5, execution of notification effect is determined. is determined to be 55% and no execution of the information effect is determined to be 45%, and in setting 6, execution of the information effect is determined to be 60% and non-execution of the information effect is determined to be 40%. That is, setting 1<setting 2<setting 3<setting 4<setting 5<setting 6 have a higher percentage of decisions to be executed.

FIG. 12-13(B) is a diagram showing a notification effect content determination table. Depending on the number of hits in the reserved storage buffer, the pattern of the contents of the notification effect to be executed is different. Then, the decision ratio of the pattern of the contents of the notification effect differs according to the set value. First, when the number of hits in the pending storage buffer is 1, "V×1" is determined as the content of notification effect common to setting 1 to setting 6. FIG. When the number of hits is 1, a common effect is executed regardless of the set value. Also, when the number of hits in the pending storage buffer is 2, the notification effect by "Vx2" or "Vx1" is executed. Setting 1<setting 2<setting 3<setting 4<setting 5<setting 6 are likely to be determined in the order of "V×2" notification effect contents.

Also, when the number of hits in the pending storage buffer is 3, any one of "Vx3", "Vx2" and "Vx1" is executed. In the order of setting 1<setting 2<setting 3<setting 4<setting 5<setting 6, it is likely to be determined to the notification effect contents of “V×2” or “V×3”. Also, for each set value, "Vx3" is easier to determine than "Vx2". Also, when the number of wins in the pending storage buffer is 4, any one of "Vx4", "Vx3", "Vx2" and "Vx1" is executed. . In the order of setting 1<setting 2<setting 3<setting 4<setting 5<setting 6, it is likely to be determined to the notification effect content of “V×3” or “V×4”. Also, when the set value is low, the ratio of determination to "Vx1" or "Vx2" is high, and when the set value is high, it is determined to be "Vx3" or "Vx4". percentage is high.

FIG. 12-13(C) is a diagram showing a V mode determination table. The V mode includes a first mode indicated by a white small V and a second mode indicated by a red large V. At any set value, the first mode is more likely to be determined than the second mode. In addition, the ratio of setting to the second mode increases in the order of setting 1<setting 2<setting 3<setting 4<setting 5<setting 6. FIG.

FIG. 12-13(D) is a table for determining execution of a hit suggesting effect. If there is a hit in the pending storage buffer, it is determined that the suggestive effect is always executed regardless of the set value. FIG. 12-13(E) is a non-hit suggestion effect execution determination table. When there is no win in the reserved storage buffer, regardless of the setting value, the execution of the suggestive effect is determined at a rate of 30% and the non-execution of the suggestive effect is determined at a rate of 70%.

12-14 are flowcharts showing the notification effect processing. The notification effect process is included in the process executed in the pre-reading announcement setting process (S161 in FIG. 7). The effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the current game state is the start of the jackpot (152FS001). Whether or not to execute the notification effect and the contents of the notification effect are determined at the timing of the start of the big win. If it is not the start of the jackpot (152FS001; N), the process is terminated. If it is the start of the jackpot (152FS001; Y), the inside of the pending storage buffer provided in the RAM 122 is confirmed (152FS002). This makes it possible to check whether information about various flags and commands is in the pending storage buffer.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the notification effect completion flag, which is set when the notification effect is executed, is set (152FS003). If the notification effect completion flag is set (152FS003; Y), the process is terminated. If the notification effect completed flag is not set (152FS003; N), it is determined whether or not there is a pending memory of a big hit or a small hit (152FS004). If there is a big hit or a small hit pending memory (152FS004; Y), the presence or absence of execution of the notification effect according to the set value is determined by the notification effect execution/non-execution determination table shown in FIG. 12-13 (A) ( 152FS005).

After 152FS005, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not execution of the notification effect is determined (152FS006). If it is determined not to execute the notification effect (152FS006; N), the process proceeds to 152FS010. When it is determined that the notification effect is to be executed (152FS006; Y), the notification effect completion flag is set (152FS007). Next, the content of the notification effect corresponding to the number of hits and the set value is determined by the content of notification effect determination table shown in FIG. 12-13(B) (152FS008). Next, the V mode is determined by the V mode determination table shown in FIG. 12-13(C) (152FS009). Next, it is determined whether or not the suggestive effect is to be executed, according to the winning suggestive effect execution determination table shown in FIG. 12-13(D) (152FS010). In addition, in 152FS010, it is determined that the suggestive effect is always executed. After that, it shifts to the processing of 152FS011.

In 152FS004, when it is determined that there is no pending memory for the big win or the small win (152FS004; N), whether or not to execute the suggestive effect is determined according to the winning no-time suggestive effect execution decision table shown in FIG. 12-13 (E). (152FS012). After that, it shifts to the processing of 152FS011. In the processing of 1523FS011, the determined various effects are set to be executed during the ending of the big win (152FS011). Then, the process ends.

[Main configurations and effects obtained by characteristic portions 152F and 153F]
[1] If a game machine with a setting function is used to perform continuous notification on hold, there is a risk that the execution rate of continuous notification on hold will depend on the set value because the probability of a big hit differs depending on the set value, making it impossible to perform a suitable notification effect. be. In the characteristic portion 152F, the effect control CPU 120 executes a notification effect for notifying that it is a holding group controlled to win (big win or small win) in the ending period of the big win game state. Then, in the characteristic part 152F, as shown in FIG. 12-13(A), when there is a pending memory of a big hit or a small hit, execution or non-execution of the notification effect is determined at different ratios according to the setting values 1 to 6. be. Thus, by changing the execution ratio of the notification effect according to the set value, it becomes possible to execute the notification effect according to the situation. In this way, by suitably performing notification effects in a game machine having a setting function, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[2] As shown in FIG. 12-13(A), setting 6 is determined to have notification effect execution at a higher rate than setting 1. Specifically, setting 1<setting 2<setting 3<setting 4<setting 5<setting 6 are likely to be determined in the order of setting 1<setting 2<setting 6. FIG. As a result, the high setting can be expected by executing the notification effect, and the interest in the game is improved.

[3] As shown in FIG. 12-13(B), setting 6 has a higher execution rate of the notification effect indicating that a plurality of wins are stored than setting 1. Specifically, when a plurality of wins are stored in the pending storage buffer, the notification effect for the same number as the number of wins is executed in the order of setting 1<setting 2<setting 3<setting 4<setting 5<setting 6. It is easier to be As a result, a notification performance indicating that a plurality of holding information of a hit (big hit or small win) determined to be controlled to a big win game state (including a big win via a small win) is stored is executed. Expectations can be made for the high setting, and the interest in the game is improved.

[4] The effect control CPU 120 can execute a suggestive effect by means of a suggestive image 152F001 shown in FIG. 12-12(a). Then, as shown in FIGS. 12-13 (D) and (E), the suggestive effect has a common execution ratio for settings 1-6. As a result, the suggestive effect is executed at a common rate regardless of the set value, so that the player's expectation for the notification effect can be aroused, and the interest in the game is improved.
[5] If a game machine with a setting function performs continuous notification on hold, there is a possibility that the execution rate of continuous notification on hold depends on the set value because the probability of big wins differs depending on the set value, and a suitable notification effect cannot be performed. be. In the characteristic part 153F, the effect control CPU 120 executes a notification effect for notifying that it is a holding group controlled to win (big win or small win) in the ending period of the big win game state. In the characteristic part 153F, as shown in FIG. 12-13(C), when there is a pending memory of a big hit or a small hit, the notification effect by one of the V modes is performed at different rates according to the set values 1 to 6. determined to be executed. Thus, by changing the mode of the notification effect according to the set value, it is possible to estimate the set value according to the mode of the notification effect. In this way, by suitably performing notification effects in a game machine having a setting function, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[6] As shown in FIG. 12-13(C), setting 6 is determined to execute the notification effect in the large red V mode at a higher rate than setting 1. Specifically, setting 1<setting 2<setting 3<setting 4<setting 5<setting 6 are likely to be determined in the order of the V mode of the second mode with large red. As a result, by executing the notification effect according to the second mode, expectations can be given to the high setting, and the amusement of the game is improved.

[Other Modifications of Characteristic Portions 1522F and 153F]
[1] After being controlled to the jackpot game state for a specific number of times, if the notification effect is not executed while being controlled to the jackpot game state for the specific number of times, high setting (for example, setting 6) , the notification effect may be executed at a rate higher than the rate at which the notification effect is determined to be executed. Specifically, when the notification effect is not executed in spite of the fact that there was a case where the winning reservation information was stored when the tenth big win was controlled, setting 6 determines that the notification effect is to be executed. The notification effect may be executed at a rate higher than 60%. If the notification performance is not executed for too long, there is a possibility that the interest in the game is lowered, but by doing so, it is possible to prevent the deterioration of the game due to the fact that the notification performance is not executed a specific number of times, for example, 10 times, and the notification performance can be prevented. can improve interest by The specific number of times is not limited to 10 times, and may be any number of times, and only the number of big wins when there is a win in the reserve storage buffer but the notification performance is not executed is counted, and when there is no win. The number of jackpots may not be counted. In addition, it is also possible to make the rate of determination to execute the notification effect increase as the number of times of big wins in which the notification effect is not executed regardless of the presence or absence of a win increases.

[2] A plurality of jackpots with different degrees of advantage may be provided in the jackpot game state. For example, a 4R jackpot and a 15R jackpot with different numbers of rounds may be provided. In the big win game state, when there is a pending memory of the 4R big win, setting 6 can execute the notification performance at a higher rate than setting 1, and when there is a pending memory of the 15R big win, The notification effect may be executed at a common ratio between setting 1 and setting 6. - 特許庁In other words, when there is a big win that is disadvantageous to the advantageous player in the pending storage buffer, it is determined that the higher the setting, the more likely the notification effect is executed, and if there is a big win that is advantageous to the advantageous player in the pending storage buffer, it is set. The notification effect may be executed at a common rate regardless of the value. In this way, even when a big win with a low advantage is executed after that, it is expected that the advantage is low but the setting is high, so that the interest in the game can be improved.

[3] When a plurality of wins are stored in the pending storage buffer, the notification effect by the large red V mode may be executed at a higher rate than the small white V mode. In this way, when the notification performance by the large red V mode is executed, it is possible to expect that a plurality of pieces of holding information determined to be controlled to the big win game state are stored, Increased interest in gaming.

[4] In the above-described embodiment, a variable winning means (V winning device) that allows game media to enter in a predetermined state (small win), and a specific area provided in the variable winning means and into which game media can enter (V winning opening), a first state control means (per kind) for controlling to an advantageous state based on the display result, and a specific area in the variable winning means for controlling to a predetermined state (small win) based on the display result In the above description, the game machine is provided with a second state control means (per two types) for controlling to an advantageous state based on the entry of the game medium into the specific area in the predetermined state. In summary, in the above-described embodiment, a jackpot is won based on a game ball winning (V winning) in a specific winning opening (V winning opening) in a V winning device (so-called accessory) provided in the game area. A game machine that shifts to a game state (so-called second type game machine) has been described, but a game machine that shifts to a big hit game state based on the variable display result of special symbols and production patterns (so-called first type game machine) may be applied to Even in such a case, the higher the set value, the higher the execution ratio of the notification effect. In addition, the higher the set value, the easier it is to execute the notification effect according to the second mode. In this way, if it is a game machine of one type + two types, it can be appealed by the notification effect that the setting is high, and if it is a game machine of one type, it can be notified without being based on the jackpot probability due to the setting difference. It is possible to easily adjust the performance execution ratio.

[5] In the above-described embodiment, a case has been described in which the notification effect is executed during the ending effect period of the big win. However, the notification effect may be executed in a period other than that. For example, it may be executed in the round immediately after the start of the big win or in the round during the big win game. In addition, the notification performance may be executed at a plurality of timings during the jackpot game. For example, the notification effect may be executed during the period during the round and during the ending period. Also, the ratio of timing at which the notification effect is executed may be different among a plurality of timings according to the set value.

[6] In the above-described embodiment, the total number of balls won during the round may be displayed when the big win ends. Then, during execution of the display, an effect may be executed to make it appear that the big win is finished and to restore the game. Also, the notification effect may be executed when the reviving effect is executed.

[7] In the above-described embodiment, the inside of the holding storage buffer is confirmed at the start of the big win, and if the winning holding information is stored, the determination of whether or not to execute the notification effect is executed by one lottery. explained the case. However, when there are a plurality of hits, a lottery as to whether or not to execute the notification effect may be executed for each hit. Also, the ratio of execution/non-execution of the notification effect may differ depending on the number of wins. For example, when there are a plurality of wins in the pending storage buffer, the execution ratio of the notification effect may be higher than when there is one win. As a result, it is possible to make it easy to guess the set value when there is a low probability of occurrence that a plurality of hits exist in the reserve storage buffer, and to execute a notification advantageous to the player in such a state. can. Further, the execution ratio of the notification effect may differ depending on the timing at which the hold information in which the win is stored is executed. Specifically, the execution ratio of the notification effect when the next variable display executed after the big win is a hit is higher than the execution ratio of the notification effect when the variable display four times after the big win is a win. You may make it

[8] In the above-described embodiment, a case has been described where the execution ratio of the notification effect is higher as the setting is higher. However, the execution ratio of the notification effect may be set higher as the setting is lower. In this way, even if the setting is low, it is possible to improve the interest of the presentation during the big hit by the notification presentation. In addition, even if the setting is low, it is possible to give a sense of expectation to the high setting. Also, the execution ratio of the notification effect may be adjusted to be the same between the high setting and the low setting. In this way, the present set value can be made difficult to guess because the notification performance is executed at the same rate regardless of the high setting with a high jackpot probability or the low setting with a low jackpot probability.

[9] In the above-described embodiment, the first mode of small white and the second mode of large red have been described as the V mode. However, there may be more than one type of V mode, and it may be different only in color or shape. Also, there may be a mode in which only specific set values are displayed. Specifically, there may be a rainbow-colored V mode as a third mode that is displayed only when the setting is 4 or higher (setting 6 may be confirmed or the like). Also, in the high setting, the second mode may be displayed at a higher rate than the first mode.

[10] In the above-described embodiment, a suggestive image may be provided with a plurality of modes. Then, depending on the mode of the suggested image to be executed, it is suggested whether or not the V image as the notification effect can be acquired (whether or not it is displayed), and the number of obtainable V as the content of the notification effect is suggested. good too. Specifically, white, blue, and red modes are provided as suggestive images, and the expected degree of obtaining V and the degree of expectation of the number of V obtained when obtained increases in the order of white < blue < red. good.

[11] In the above-described embodiment, the high setting fixed pattern may be provided in the V mode, and the high setting fixed pattern may be executed when a predetermined condition is satisfied. Specifically, when a predetermined condition is satisfied that there are four hits in the pending storage buffer at settings 5 and 6, the notification performance may be executed with a probability of 100%.

[12] In the above-described embodiment, a pattern may be provided in which a specific set value is denied. Specifically, setting 1 may be denied when the notification effect is not executed although there are four wins in the pending storage buffer. In this way, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the period during which the pending wins are consumed.

[13] In the above-described embodiment, it is also possible to set the degree of expectation of the high setting to be higher when the same notification as the actual number of wins is given than when the notification different from the actual number of wins is given. Specifically, when the number of wins is 3, annunciation of "Vx3" is higher than the case of annunciation of "Vx3" when the number of wins is 4. You may make it high degree.

[14] In the above-described embodiment, the case where the display of the V mode displayed on the screen is different as a change in the mode of the notification effect has been described. However, as a change in the form of the notification effect, changes such as a sound to be output, light emission by a game effect lamp, vibration, or air ejection may be executed. Specifically, in the notification effect consisting of the first mode and the second mode, the same display is performed on the screen, but when the notification effect of the second mode is performed, only the player during the game can experience it. Vibration may be applied. In this way, only the player who is playing can know the suggestion of the high setting, so that it is possible to prevent another player who sees the screen display from aiming at the game table and playing the game. can. Conversely, the high setting may be appealed by announcing the high setting with a sound or a lamp. In this way, it is possible to give a player playing a game on a high-setting-suggestion platform an exhilarating feeling.

(Description of Characteristic Portion 003AK)
Next, feature 003AK will be described. When the pachinko game machine 1 of the characteristic part 003AK is controlled to an advantageous state (a small winning game state controlled to a big winning game state or a V winning game state), a hold corresponding to being controlled to an advantageous state It is possible to execute a notification effect (hold continuous notification) that notifies that information is stored (that there is a big hit in the hold, that the reservation will be held), and when the notification effect is executed, a specific display ( display indicating that the hold information corresponding to being controlled to be in an advantageous state is stored), and the specific display means displays the specific display at least in the first mode and the first mode. It can be displayed in any one of a plurality of types of display modes including a second mode that is more advantageous for the player than the mode, and when the specific display of the first mode is displayed, the second mode is displayed. When the condition for displaying the specific display of the mode is established, it is possible to execute a change effect for changing the specific display from the first mode to the second mode.

In other words, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to 003AK, by executing the notification effect and displaying the specific display, there is hold information controlled to be in an advantageous state (that there is a jackpot in the hold, ) is indicated, the specific display may change to a more advantageous display mode. As a result, when the specific display of the first mode is displayed, the player can expect that the mode will change to a mode with a higher degree of advantage, and the interest in the game is improved.

Characteristic portions of the pachinko game machine 1 having the feature 003AK will be described below. For other parts that are not described here, the configuration of the pachinko game machine 1 described in the basic description above and the configuration of other characteristic portions may be appropriately adopted.

First, the operation of the pachinko game machine 1 having the feature 003AK will be described. FIG. 13-1 is a flowchart showing the operation of the holding continuous notification process for executing the holding continuous notification of the feature part 003AK in the jackpot game state. The continuous pending notification process is executed within the big hit effect process in step S176 of FIG. In the suspension continuous notification process, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not it is time to execute the suspension continuous notification (step 003AKS001). If it is determined that it is not time to execute the continuous notification on hold (step 003AKS001; No), the continuous notification setting process on hold is terminated.

The execution timing of the continuous suspension notification may be set to any timing from the start to the end of the advantageous state. In this embodiment, it is in the middle of the predetermined round (for example, the 4th round, etc.) in the jackpot game state. At step 003AKS001, for example, it is determined whether or not it is time to start round 4. Note that there may be a plurality of types of execution timing and one of them may be determined. Further, the execution timing and the determination ratio of the execution timing may differ depending on the jackpot type in the jackpot game state under control and the jackpot type in the hold.

The execution timing of the holding continuous notification may be during a small hit game state in which the game ball can win a prize in the V judgment prize winning device 87 as shown in FIG. 12-1. That is, the continuous suspension notification may be executed during the small winning game state in which the V prize can be won as an advantageous state. In addition, although the advantageous state has not actually started, the interval until the advantageous state starts after the decorative symbols are aligned in a winning combination, or the variable display controlled to the advantageous state (for example, execution pending The pending continuous notification may be executed during variable display of the continuous notification target. In addition, in order to prevent the occurrence frequency of short-term jackpots from becoming excessive, if an interval is set before the start of an advantageous state after the combination of decorative patterns has been completed, the interval may be used to notify the player of the pending continuous notification. By executing, it is possible to prevent the performance from being slowed down and the interest from being lowered.

When it is determined that it is time to execute the continuous notification on hold (step 003AKS001; Yes), the continuous notification on hold flag indicating that the continuous notification on hold is being executed and the specific display is being displayed (during continuous notification on hold) is ON. (Step 003AKS002). In this embodiment, in response to the execution of the on-hold continuous notification, a specific display indicating that there is a hit within the on-hold is continuously displayed until the hit to be notified occurs. In response to the display of such a specific display, if the on-hold continuous notification flag is ON (step 003AKS002; Yes), the continuous-hold notification setting process is terminated and a new continuous notification on hold is executed. do not.

It should be noted that a new hold continuous notification may be executed while the specific display is being displayed. In such a case, the specific display may be newly displayed or the display mode of the specific display may be changed in response to the execution of the new continuous-on-hold notification.

If the pending continuous notification flag is off (step 003AKS002; No), the pending information (second pending information) of the currently stored pending numbers 1 to 3 will hit (small hit or big hit). It is determined whether or not there is (step 003AKS003).

The effect control CPU 120 produces the information based on, for example, receiving from the main board 11 an effect control command for designating the generation of the starting prize or an effect control command for designating the judgment result of the look-ahead judgment. As suspension information for control, it is stored in a predetermined area of RAM 122 (a storage area for suspension information for effect control). FIG. 13-2 shows an example of the pending information storage area for effect control. As shown in FIG. 13-2, the "holding number" corresponding to the storage order of the holding information and the "display result" specified from the effect control command for specifying the judgment result of the prefetch judgment are associated and held. stored as information. The pending information with the pending number 0 in FIG. 13B is the pending information corresponding to the variable display being executed. In addition, each hold information includes information that can specify that it is a “notification target” of the hold continuous notification, information that indicates “change timing” when executing a change effect described later, timing to execute an erasure effect described later is stored in association with information indicating the "erase timing". Information other than these (for example, variation pattern information, etc.) may be associated and stored as the pending information. In the production control pending information storage area, new pending information is stored within the range of the upper limit number (4) each time a new start winning is generated, and each time the variable display ends or starts, a pending number The hold information of 0 is erased, and the hold information after the hold number 1 is shifted to the hold number one lower and updated.

In FIG. 13-2, the variable display being executed is a small win, and in the jackpot game state via the small win, it shows that the hold continuous notification is executed for the hold information of the hold numbers 2 and 3. . In addition, execution timings of changing effects and erasing effects, which will be described later, are also stored. In addition, in the example shown in FIG. 13-2, it is assumed that the hit type (including the hit type in which a big hit occurs via a small hit) as shown in FIG. 12-2.

In the process of step 003AKS003, it may be determined whether or not the second pending information of the pending numbers 1 to 3 contains the pending information with the winning display result by referring to the effect control pending information storage area.

In addition, the pending|holding information storage area for production|presentation control should just be provided with the pending|holding information corresponding to a 1st special figure, and the pending|holding information corresponding to a 2nd special figure. The reservation information storage area for effect control shown in FIG. 13-2 corresponds to the second special figure.

Since the variable display of the second special figure is executed with priority over the variable display of the first special figure, the game usually progresses by the variable display of the second special figure in the high base state after the end of the jackpot game state. be done. Therefore, in this embodiment, as a target of the continuous notification of suspension, the continuous notification of suspension is executed for the second suspension information corresponding to the second special figure (winning to the second start winning opening). Therefore, in step 003AKS003, it is determined whether or not there is any hit in the second reservation information. It should be noted that, although omitted in the figure, when it becomes a big hit in the normal state, because it is assumed that there is no or less number of second pending information, in this embodiment high base state (time saving state) In the case of a big hit, the holding continuous notification is executed in the big win game state (advantageous state). It should be noted that, regardless of the gaming state, the continuous suspension notification may be executed.

In addition, you may make it perform a reservation continuous notification about the 1st reservation information corresponding to a 1st special figure (a prize to a 1st starting prize-winning opening). For example, when the jackpot is achieved in the normal state, continuous suspension notification may be executed for the first suspension information. In this case, the effect mode of the continuous on-hold notification may be different from the effect mode of the continuous on-hold notification for the second on-hold information.

Up to four pieces of second hold information can be stored, and in this embodiment, the second hold information of hold numbers 1 to 3 can be subjected to continuous hold notification. Therefore, in step 003AKS003, it is determined whether or not there is a hit in the second hold information of the hold numbers 1 to 3, not all the hold numbers.

For example, in a state where four pieces of the second hold information are stored, when only the hold number 4 is the hold information that becomes a hit, when the hold continuous notification is executed for the hold number 4, the jackpot game state ends. After that, the variable display of the second special figure will be executed three times before the variable display that becomes the hit that actually becomes the hold continuous notification is executed. In the case of the longest time (for example, two minutes) of the variable display time that can be selected by these three variable displays, the longest time until the variable display that becomes a big win is started after the big win game state in which the continuous notification of suspension is executed is ended. It takes about 6 minutes, and it takes about 8 minutes at the longest until the jackpot game state is reached. In this way, in order to prevent the process from becoming redundant until the big hit corresponding to the continuous on-hold notification despite the execution of the on-hold consecutive notification, in this embodiment, the on-hold information of the on-hold number 4 is It is excluded from the subject of continuous notification on hold. As a result, it is possible to prevent the effect from being delayed after the continuous notification of the holding, and to prevent the interest from being lowered.

In addition, it is not limited to excluding the hold information of the hold number 4 from the target of the continuous hold notification. It may be excluded from continuous notification. In addition, hold information with a hold number of 2 or less may be excluded from continuous hold notification. For example, a variation pattern (variation time) corresponding to each piece of hold information may be read in advance, and depending on the variation time, it may be determined which hold information is to be subjected to continuous hold notification. For example, even hold information for which the total fluctuation time corresponding to the stored hold information is within a specific range may be subject to continuous hold notification. In this way, according to the variable time corresponding to the stored hold information, it is possible to secure the execution opportunity of the continuous hold notification while preventing the delay of the performance after the continuous hold notification. Hold continuous notification can be executed.

If there is no hit in the currently stored second hold information of hold numbers 1 to 3 (step 003AKS003; No), the hold continuous notification setting process is terminated. If there is a hit in the currently stored second hold information of hold numbers 1 to 3 (step 003AKS003; Yes), it is determined whether or not to execute hold continuous notification (step 003AKS004).

At step 003AKS004, for example, it is determined (determined) whether or not to execute continuous hold notification at the rate shown in FIG. 13-3(A). As shown in FIG. 13-3(A), at step 003AKS004, it is determined that continuous on-hold notification is to be executed 30% of the time, and it is determined that continuous on-hold notification is not to be executed 70% of the time. When there are a plurality of on-hold hits, it is determined whether or not continuous on-hold notification is to be executed for each on-hold hit. In addition, depending on the number of hits in the hold, whether the hit in the hold is a big hit or a small hit, and the hit type (number of rounds, presence or absence of variable probability control and time saving control, etc.), etc. You can let Also, the execution determination ratio may be any ratio as long as it is possible to suitably execute the continuous on-hold notification.

Subsequently, it is determined whether or not it is determined in step 003AKS004 that continuous notification of suspension is to be executed (step 003AKS005). If it is determined not to execute the continuous on-hold notification (step 003AKS005; No), the continuous on-hold notification setting process is terminated.

When it is determined to execute the continuous notification on hold (step 003AKS005; Yes), the execution timing of the erasing effect is determined (step 003AKS006). In this embodiment, a specific display indicating that there is a hit in the hold is displayed in a predetermined display area of the image display device 5 in response to execution of the hold consecutive notification. Then, the specific display is erased in response to the execution of the erasing effect in the variable display that is the target of the continuous suspension notification. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 13-4, as the execution timing of the erasing effect, timing TA before executing the ready-to-win effect in the variable display that is the target of the continuous notification on hold and timing TB during the execution of the ready-to-win effect. is provided.

At step 003AKS006, for example, the execution timing of the elimination effect is determined at the rate shown in FIG. 13-3(B). As shown in FIG. 13-3(B), in step 003AKS006, timing TA is determined at a rate of 40% and timing TB at a rate of 60% as the execution timing (erasure timing) of the elimination effect. When there are a plurality of objects to be subjected to continuous notification on hold, the erasing timing is determined for each on-hold hit. In addition, depending on the number of hits in the hold, whether the hit in the hold is a big hit or a small hit, and the hit type (number of rounds, probability variation control, time saving control, etc.), etc. good too. Also, the determination ratio may be any ratio as long as the erasing effect can be suitably executed. In this embodiment, the timing TB, which is later than the timing TA, is more frequently determined. By doing so, even if the elimination performance is not executed at the timing TA, the player's sense of expectation can be maintained until the timing TB.

As described above, in this embodiment, the erasing effect is executed in the variable display that is the target of the continuous on-hold notification, and a plurality of execution timings of the erasing effect are provided in the variable display. As a result, the variable display of the object to be subjected to continuous notification of suspension is clarified by the erasing performance, and a plurality of execution timings of the erasing performance are provided, thereby diversifying the performance variations and improving the amusement of the game.

Note that the execution timing of the elimination effect is not limited to the timings TA and TB in FIG. 13-4, and may be any timing until the hit for which the pending consecutive notification is executed. Also, the execution timing is not limited to two types, and may be three or more types, and may be executed in a variable display other than the execution target of the continuous hold notification. Further, the execution timing of the erasing effect may be constant. Further, at the execution timing of the erasing effect, an effect may be executed to prompt whether or not the erasing effect is to be executed. Then, the rate at which the erasing effect is executed may differ depending on the effect mode of the stimulating effect. By doing so, it is possible to improve the production effect of the on-hold continuous notification and the erasure production, thereby improving the interest.

When there are a plurality of objects to be subjected to continuous notification on hold, the erasing timing may be set so that the erasing effect is always executed in the variable display with the lowest reservation number (the execution order of the variable display is the earliest). When the erasing timing of the specific display cannot be determined due to the control or the malfunction of the RAM 122 or the influence of noise, or when the erasing timing cannot be read even though it has been determined, the erasing effect cannot be executed and the erasing timing after which it should be originally erased. There is also a possibility that the specific display will continue to be displayed. Therefore, after executing the holding continuous notification and displaying the specific display, the effect control CPU 120 received the effect control command (hit start designation command etc.) indicating that it will be the first hit after the holding continuous notification is executed. Based on this, the erasing effect may be executed. For example, when the specific display of the first mode is displayed based on the reception of the effect control command, the erasing effect of erasing the specific display of the first mode is executed, and the specific display of the second mode is displayed. When it is displayed, it is also possible to execute an erasing effect of erasing the specific display of the second mode and changing it to the specific display of the first mode. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the specific display from being continuously displayed due to a problem, and to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable or distrustful.

After determining the execution timing of the erasing effect in step ASK006, a specific display pattern corresponding to the mode of specific display to be displayed in response to execution of the continuous notification of suspension is determined (step 003AKS007).

In this embodiment, a first mode and a second mode indicating that there are a plurality of pending hits are provided as display modes of the specific display. Therefore, the specific display of the second mode is more advantageous for the player than the specific display of the first mode. In this way, by providing the second mode indicating that there are a plurality of hits within the reserve, it is possible to notify that multiple hits will be achieved with one notification, and the player can display the specific display in the second mode. As a result, the interest in directing increases.

In this embodiment, as the specific display patterns, a specific display pattern A that displays the specific display in the first mode and a specific display pattern B that displays the specific display in the second mode are provided. Further, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the characteristic portion 003AK, a specific display pattern C is provided in which a change effect is executed to change to the second mode after the specific display is displayed in the first mode. In this way, the specific display is a display mode indicating that there are a plurality of pending hits from the first mode, and may change to the second mode with a higher degree of advantage, so the specific display of the first mode is displayed. A player can expect that a change performance is executed and the game changes to the second mode when the game is on, and the amusement of the game is improved.

In addition, the second mode shows that the number of hits in the reserve is larger than that in the first mode, and thus has a high degree of advantage for the player. However, the second mode is more advantageous than the first mode. Any mode with a high degree will suffice. For example, the second mode may be a mode that indicates that the winning type of the on-hold winning is more advantageous than the first mode. For example, the second mode may be a mode indicating that the number of rounds of the jackpot game state and the number of prize balls that can be obtained are larger than those in the first mode, or the game state after the jackpot game state (probability variable control (presence or absence of time reduction, etc.) may be an aspect indicating that it is advantageous.

In step 003AKS007, the specific display pattern is determined according to the ratio shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 13-3(C), in step 003AKS007, when there is one hold hit for execution of hold continuous notification, specific display pattern A is determined, When there are two or more inner hits, the specific display pattern B is determined at a rate of 40%, and the specific display pattern C is determined at a rate of 60%. In addition, the number of hits in the hold, including those not subject to continuous notification, whether the hit in the hold targeted for execution of the continuous notification is a big hit or a small hit, the hit type (the number of rounds, the presence or absence of variable probability control and time saving control etc.), etc., the determination ratio of the specific display pattern may be varied. Also, the determined ratio may be any ratio as long as the specific display can be preferably displayed. Note that, in this embodiment, when there are two or more pending hits for which the continuous notification on hold is to be executed, the specific display pattern C in which the change effect is executed is decided rather than the specific display pattern B in which the change effect is not executed. are more likely to be By doing so, even when there are two or more pending hits to be executed for the pending continuous notification, the ratio of being displayed in the first mode is high, so the specific display is displayed in the first mode It is possible to suppress the disappointment of the player and heighten the player's expectation that the change performance will be executed.

In this embodiment, as the display mode of the specific display, the first mode and the second mode indicating that there are a plurality of on-hold hits are provided. There may be provided three or more display modes with different expected values of numbers and different degrees of advantage of winning types. Then, along with the execution of the change effect, the display mode may be changed from a display mode with a low degree of advantage to a display mode with a higher degree of advantage. For example, a first mode, a second mode with a higher degree of advantage than the first mode, and a third mode with a higher degree of advantage than the second mode are provided, the first mode is changed to the second mode, and further A specific display pattern that changes to the third mode or a specific display pattern that changes from the first mode to the third mode may be provided. By doing so, the effects related to the specific display are diversified, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game during the continuous suspension notification.

In this embodiment, when executing the continuous notification on hold, it is determined whether or not to execute the change effect (whether to use the specific display pattern C) based on the number of hits in the reservation for which the continuous notification on hold is executed. It has become. By doing so, it is determined whether or not to execute the change effect based on the hold information at the time of execution of the hold continuous notification, so there is no need to monitor the hold information after the hold continuous notification is executed, so the processing load is reduced. Change production can be executed without increasing.

After determining the specific display pattern in step 003AKS007, it is determined whether or not it is decided to execute a change effect, that is, whether or not the specific display pattern C is decided (step 003AKS008).

When it is determined to execute the change effect (step 003AKS008; Yes), the execution timing of the change effect is determined (step 003AKS009). In this embodiment, as the execution timing of the change effect, as shown in FIG. 13-5, the timing 1-ta immediately after the start of the first fluctuation after the end of the jackpot game state in which the continuous notification is executed, and the timing after that 1-tb, timing 2-ta immediately after the start of the second fluctuation after execution of continuous notification of suspension, and timing 2-tb after that are provided. It should be noted that the timing (time from the start of variation) in each variation of timing 1-ta and timing 2-ta is the same, the timing in each variation of timing 1-tb and timing 2-tb is the same, and the leading numerical value indicates the number of fluctuations after the end of the jackpot gaming state. That is, the timings 1-ta and 1-tb are the timings ta and tb of the first variation after the end of the jackpot game state, and the timings 2-ta and 2-tb are the timings of the second variation after the end of the jackpot game state. It shows that it is ta and tb.

The execution timings ta and tb of the change effect in one variable display are timings before the timings TA and TB which are the execution timings of the erasing effect in the one variable display. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the inconsistency of effects such that the erasing effect is executed and the specific display is erased before the change effect is executed. In addition, it becomes possible to execute the erasing effect after executing the change effect in one variable display, so that the effect is diversified and the interest is improved. Furthermore, by setting the execution timing of erasing performance in advance after the execution timing of change performance, adjustment of execution timing of each performance becomes unnecessary and an increase in control load can be prevented.

As shown in FIG. 13-5, since the change effect is executed in one of a plurality of variable displays, the variation of the effect becomes diverse, and at any timing the specific display changes to a highly expected mode. It is possible to make the user pay attention to whether or not the performance is executed, thereby improving interest.

At step 003AKS009, for example, the execution timing of the change effect is determined at the rate shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 13-3 (D), in step 003AKS009, when the first hit is the reservation number 1, the execution timing (change timing) of the change effect is after the jackpot game state in which the reservation continuous notification is executed. is determined at a rate of 40% at the timing 1-ta of the first variation, and at a rate of 60% at the timing 1-tb. In this way, when the first hit is the reservation number 1, the erasure performance is executed in the first variation after the end of the big win game state and the win is achieved, so the variation performance is performed in the variation. Also, when the first hit is the reservation number 2, the execution timing (change timing) of the change effect is determined at a rate of 10% at the timing 1-ta and at a rate of 20% at the timing 1-tb, The timing 2-ta is determined at a rate of 30%, and the timing 2-tb is determined at a rate of 40%.

In addition, whether the hit in the reserve is a big hit or a small hit, the hit type (the number of rounds, the presence or absence of variable probability control and time saving control, etc.) etc. may be changed according to the determination ratio of the change timing. Also, the determined ratio may be any ratio as long as the change effect can be suitably executed. It should be noted that, in this embodiment, as the change timing, the rate of determining the later timing among the change timings that can be executed is high. By doing so, even if the change effect is not executed at the previous change timing, the player's expectation can be maintained until the later change timing.

The execution timing of the change effect is not limited to timings 1-ta, 1-tb, 2-ta, and 2-tb in FIG. good. Further, the execution timing is not limited to two types for each variation, and may be three or more types for each variation or may be constant. Further, the execution timing of the change effect may be executed with a predetermined variation (for example, the first variation after the jackpot game state). Furthermore, at the execution timing of the change effect, an effect may be executed to prompt whether or not the change effect is to be executed. Then, the rate at which the specific display changes may differ depending on the effect mode of the stimulating effect. By doing so, it is possible to improve the production effect of the holding continuous notification and the change production, and the interest is improved.

After executing the process of step 003AKS009, or when it is determined not to execute the change effect (step 003AKS008; No), the image display device 5 or the like executes the pending continuous notification, and as shown in FIG. After execution of the continuous hold notification, settings are made to display the specific display in the display area of the image display device 5 in the first mode or the second mode according to the determination result in step 003AKS007 (step 003AKS010). Concretely, the effect control data for executing the continuous notification on hold is read, and the continuous notification on hold is executed based on the effect control data. Then, when the specific display pattern A or the specific display pattern C is determined in step 003AKS007, the specific display is displayed in the first mode, and when the specific display pattern B is determined, the specific display is displayed in the second mode. control for Further, the RAM 122 is provided with a specific display mode storage area for storing information capable of specifying the display mode of the specific mode being displayed. 2 mode) is stored in the specific display mode storage area.

After that, step 003AKS004, step 003AKS006, and step 003AKS008 according to the determination result in the suspension information storage area for effect control shown in FIG. (Step 003AKS011). Specifically, information (such as a flag) indicating that the continuous on-hold notification is to be executed is stored in the "notification target" of the on-hold information determined to execute the continuous on-hold notification at step 003AKS004, The "delete timing" obtained is stored in association with the suspension information corresponding to the notification target, and the "change timing" determined in step 003AKS008 is stored in association with the suspension information corresponding to the change timing.

Specifically, when timing 1-ta or 1-tb is determined in step 003AKS008, ta or tb is associated with the "change timing" of the hold information of hold number 1 and stored, and timing 2-ta or When 2-tb is determined, ta or tb is associated with the "change timing" of the hold information of hold number 2 and stored. Thereby, by referring to the "change timing" of the hold information of the hold number 0 at the start of the change, it is possible to execute the change effect in the change and to specify the change timing.

Subsequently, the holding continuous notification flag indicating that the holding continuous notification is executed and the specific display is being displayed (holding continuous notification in progress) is set to ON state (step 003AKS012), and the holding continuous notification setting process is terminated. do.

In this embodiment, the erasing timing of the specific display and the changing timing of the specific display are determined at the execution timing of the continuous hold notification (Step 003AKS006, Step 003AKS009). The timing of erasing the specific display and the timing of changing the specific display may be determined at arbitrary timing during the display of the specific display until it is erased. For example, at the start of variation during display of a specific display, it may be determined whether or not to execute a change effect in the variation, and the timing of change in the case of execution. Further, when the change starts during the display of the specific display, if the change is the target change of the continuous notification on hold, the erasing timing may be determined. In the case of determining the erasing timing, if it is decided to execute the change performance with the variation, the erasing timing may be determined after the changing timing. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of inconsistency in the effects (change effect, erasure effect) related to the specific display.

FIG. 13-6(A) is a flow chart showing the operation of the change effect setting process. The change effect setting process is executed within the variable display start setting process in step S171 of FIG. 7 before starting the variable display. The change performance setting process is a process for executing a so-called fake change performance with a variable display that is not decided to execute the change performance when the specific display is displayed in the first mode.

A fake change effect is a change effect in which the change effect suggests that the effect mode of the specific display will change, but as a result, the effect mode of the specific display does not change. By executing such a fake change performance, the execution frequency of the change performance is improved, so that the player expects that the specific display of the first mode will be changed to the second mode when it is being displayed. can be improved, and the expectation of the player can be effectively aroused.

It should be noted that the display mode of the specific display may always be changed when the change effect is executed without executing the change effect of the guess.

As shown in FIG. 13-6(A), in the change effect setting process, the effect control CPU 120 first refers to the specific display mode storage area to determine whether the specific display is displayed in the first mode. (step 003AKS021). If the specific display is not displayed in the first mode (step 003AKS021; No), the change effect setting process is terminated.

When the specific display is displayed in the first mode (step 003AKS021; Yes), by referring to the "change timing" of the pending information of the pending number 0 in the pending information storage area for effect control, change in the variable display this time It is determined whether or not an effect (a change effect that is not fake) is executed to change the specific display (step 003AKS022). In step 003AKS022, it is determined whether or not the information indicating the change timing is stored in the reservation number 0 of the reservation information storage area for effect control. When the change effect is executed in the current variable display and the specific display changes (step 003AKS022; Yes), the change effect setting process is terminated because the fake change effect is not executed.

If the specific display does not change in this variable display (step 003AKS022; No), it is determined whether or not to execute a fake change effect (step 003AKS023). At step 003AKS023, for example, it is determined whether or not to execute a false change effect at the rate shown in FIG. 13-6(B). As shown in FIG. 13-6(B), at step 003AKS023, it is decided to execute the change effect of the cheat at a rate of 10%, and it is decided not to execute the change effect of the cheat at a rate of 90%. In addition, depending on the number of hits in the hold, whether the hit in the hold is a big hit or a small hit, and the hit type (number of rounds, presence or absence of variable probability control and time saving control, etc.), etc. You can let Also, the determination ratio may be any ratio as long as it is possible to suitably execute the fake change effect.

It should be noted that, even though it is the first mode, the specific display is displayed, and it is a situation where it is decided that the win will soon occur. Preferably lower than the percentage determined not to. In other words, it is preferable that the execution frequency of the fake change effect is not extremely high. By doing so, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest, which is heightened by the display of the specific display, due to excessive execution of false change effects.

Subsequently, it is determined whether or not it is decided to execute a fake change effect (step 003AKS024). If it is not decided to execute the fake change effect (step 003AKS024; No), the change effect setting process is terminated.

If it is determined to execute a false change effect (step 003AKS024; Yes), the image display device 5 or the like is set to execute a false change effect (step 003AKS025). Based on the corresponding effect control data, control is performed to execute the change effect of the false effect, and then the change effect setting process is terminated.

FIG. 13-7 is a flow chart showing the operation of the erasing effect setting process. The erasure effect process is executed within the effect process during variable display in step S172 of FIG. 7 during variable display. The elimination effect process is a process for executing an elimination effect according to the display mode of the specific display at the elimination timing determined in the pending continuous notification setting process of FIG. 13-1.

In the erasing effect process, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not it is time to execute the erasing effect based on the effect control reservation information storage area and the elapsed time from the start of the variation (step 003AKS031). In step 003AKS031, it is determined whether or not information indicating erasure timing (information indicating TA and TB) is stored in the pending information of pending number 0 in the pending information storage area for effect control, and the information showing the erasing timing is stored. If so, it is determined whether or not the elapsed time from the start of fluctuation has reached the erasing timing. Information indicating the erasing timing is stored in the reservation information of the reservation number 0, and when it is determined that the erasing timing has been reached, it is determined that it is time to execute the erasing effect. If it is not the time to execute the erasing effect (step 003AKS031; No), the erasing effect process is terminated.

If it is time to execute the erasing effect (step 003AKS031; Yes), it is determined whether or not the specific display is displayed in the first mode by referring to the specific display mode storage area (step 003AKS032).

If the specific display is displayed in the first mode (step 003AKS032; Yes), the image display device 5 is set to execute a first clear effect as a clear effect for clearing the specific display (step 003AKS033). In step 003AKS033, control for executing the first erasing effect is performed based on the effect control data corresponding to the first erasing effect. As a result, the specific display is erased.

Thereafter, the pending continuous notification flag is reset to the off state (step 003AKS034), and the erasing effect process is terminated.

When the specific display is not displayed in the first mode (step 003AKS032; No), that is, when the specific display is displayed in the second mode, the image display device 5 performs the second erasing effect for erasing the specific display. A setting for executing the erasing effect is performed (step 003AKS035). In step 003AKS035, control for executing the second elimination effect is performed based on the effect control data corresponding to the second elimination effect.

Thus, in this embodiment, the first erasing effect is executed when the specific display is displayed in the first mode, and the first erasing effect is executed when the specific display is displayed in the second mode. A different second elimination effect is executed. For example, since the second erasing effect is executed in a situation more advantageous to the player than the first erasing effect, the mode is more flashy than the first erasing effect, the more intense mode, or the mode with a greater amount of effect (volume, amount of light, etc.). may be executed with By doing so, it is possible to execute the erasing effect in accordance with the degree of advantage for the player, the effect of the erasing effect can be enhanced, and the amusement is improved.

In this embodiment, when the second erasing effect is executed, the specific display in the second mode is erased, but the specific display in the first mode is displayed again. Therefore, after executing the process of step 003AKS035, display setting is performed to display the specific display in the first mode in the display area of the image display device 5 (step 003AKS036). After that, the erasing effect process is terminated.

Next, an example of the performance operation of the characteristic portion 003AK will be described. FIG. 13-8 shows an effect operation example in the case where the continuous notification of holding is executed in the jackpot game state. FIG. 13-8(A) shows the image display device 5 when the display result is a big hit. On the image display device 5, the characters "Big win!" are displayed, and the number "777" (small pattern) is displayed in the upper right part, indicating that the display result is a big win.

After that, the first round of the jackpot game state is started. In the jackpot game state, the current round display is displayed in the upper left portion of the image display device 5, as shown in FIG. 13-8(B), for example.

In this embodiment, the fourth round in the jackpot game state is the execution timing of the pending notification. When it is determined to execute the pending continuous notification, the round in the jackpot gaming state is completed, and in the fourth round, as shown in FIG. A specific display 003AK001 (first specific display 003AK001) of the first mode indicating "V" is displayed in the center of the image display device 5 as the pending continuous notification for notifying the user that the vehicle will be released. As shown in FIG. 13-8(D), the first specific display 003AK001 moves to the display area 003AK002 provided in the lower right portion of the image display device 5 and is displayed in a reduced size. Such display of continuous on-hold notification and specific display is executed based on the processing of step 003AKS010 in FIG. 13-1.

The first specific display 003AK001 is continuously displayed in the display area 003AK002 until at least the variable display that becomes the hit of the notification target is executed after execution of the pending continuous notification. As a result, it is possible to continuously notify that there is a win in the hold (that the game will be held in the reserve), and the variable display of the notification target becomes easy to understand.

In addition, the specific display may not always be displayed until at least the variable display that becomes the hit of the notification target is executed after the execution of the pending continuous notification, for example, a predetermined effect (notice effect or reach effect) is executed In such cases, it may be temporarily made invisible.

After that, when the big win game state ends, for example, as shown in FIG. XXXX pt") is displayed, and the jackpot game state ends.

When the jackpot game state ends, as shown in FIG. 13-8(F), in the image display device 5, variable display of decorative symbols based on the hold information is started. In FIG. 13-8(F), the downward arrow indicates that the decorative design is variably displayed in each decorative design display area.

When it is determined to execute the change effect in the first variation after the end of the jackpot game state, as shown in FIG. It is enlarged and displayed in the center of the device 5, and the effect as shown in FIG. 13-8(H) makes the first specific display 003AK001 invisible.

After that, when the effect disappears, as shown in FIG. Display 003AK003) is displayed.

As shown in FIGS. 13-8(G) to (I), an effect in which the specific display changes from the first specific display 003AK001 to the second specific display 003AK003 is a change effect. The second specific display 003AK003 is a display mode of the specific display indicating that there are multiple hits in the hold, and is more advantageous than the first specific display 003AK001. In this way, by making it possible to execute a change effect that improves the advantage of the specific display, the player's expectation can be heightened when the first specific display 003AK001 is displayed, and interest is improved.

13-8(G) to (I), the effect control reserved information storage area is referred to in the variable display effect processing of step S172 in FIG. 7, and the effect control reserved information When the change timing is stored in the storage area, control is performed to execute the change effect at the change timing (timing ta or tb).

After that, as shown in FIG. 13-8(D), the second specific display 003AK003 moves to the display area 003AK002 provided in the lower right portion of the image display device 5 and is displayed in a reduced size.

If the specific display pattern B, which displays the specific display in the second mode from the beginning, is determined as the specific display pattern, the second specific display 003AK003 is displayed at the stage of FIG. 13-8(C). Continuous notification is executed.

In addition, in step 003AKS025 of FIG. 13-6, when the setting for executing the change effect of the gimmick is performed, the same effect as shown in FIGS. 13-8 (G) and (H) is executed. After that, an effect is executed in which the first specific display 003AK001 is displayed without changing the specific display.

FIG. 13-9 shows an effect operation example when the first elimination effect is executed. In FIG. 13-9(A), the first specific display 003AK001 is displayed in the display area 003AK002 of the image display device 5, and the decoration symbol "7" stops in the left and right decoration symbol display areas to enter the reach state. indicates that

For example, when it is decided to execute the erasing effect at the timing TB during this fluctuation (timing during reach), as shown in FIG. It pops out and is enlarged and displayed in the center of the image display device 5 .

Then, as shown in FIG. 13-9(C), the image display device 5 as a whole is blacked out and becomes invisible, and the first erasing effect is executed in which the first specific display 003AK001 is erased. .

After that, as shown in FIG. 13-9(D), the decoration symbol "7" stops in the middle decoration symbol display area, and the display result is a big win. In this way, in the variable display that is the target of the continuous notification on hold, the erasing effect of erasing the specific display is executed. As a result, it is possible to execute an effect as if the specific display was digested and a win (big win) was achieved.

FIG. 13-10 shows an effect operation example when the second elimination effect is executed. In FIG. 13-10(A), the second specific display 003AK003 is displayed in the display area 003AK002 of the image display device 5, and the left and right decorative pattern display areas are stopped with the decorative pattern "7" in reach state. indicates that

For example, when it is decided to execute the erasing effect at the timing TB during this fluctuation (timing during reach), as shown in FIG. It pops out and is enlarged and displayed in the center of the image display device 5 .

Then, as shown in FIG. 13-10(C), an effect is displayed in which the image display device 5 is torn apart, and a second erasing effect is executed in which the second specific display 003AK003 is erased.

Since the second erasing effect is executed in a situation more advantageous to the player than the first erasing effect, it is executed in a flashier mode, a more intense mode, and a mode with a greater amount of effect (volume, amount of light, etc.) than the first erasing effect. may be made. For example, the sound may not be output in the first erasing effect, and the sound may be output in the second erasing effect. Further, while the performance accessory operates in the second elimination performance, the performance accessory may not operate in the first elimination performance, or the operation amount of the performance performance accessory in the first elimination performance. may be less than the first elimination effect. By doing so, it is possible to execute a different erasing effect depending on the display mode of the specific display. Then, it is possible to execute the erasing performance in accordance with the degree of advantage of the player, to enhance the performance effect of the erasing performance, and to improve the amusement.

After that, as shown in FIG. 13-10(D), the decoration symbol "7" stops in the middle decoration symbol display area, and the display result is a big win. When the second erasing effect is executed, the second specific display 003AK003 is erased, but the first specific display 003AK001 is displayed in the display area 003AK002. As a result, the second specific display 003AK003 can be erased to produce an effect as if a big win has occurred, and by re-displaying the first specific display 003AK001, the fact that there is a hit in the reserve can be continued. can be notified.

After the second erasing effect is executed, the first specific display 003AK001 is not redisplayed, and in the subsequent advantageous state, the holding continuous notification is executed again, and in accordance with the execution of the holding continuous notification, the first display is executed. A specific display 003AK001 may be displayed. By doing so, if a win is obtained while the second specific display 003AK003 is being displayed, the continuous suspension notification will be executed again, so that it can be expected that the continuous suspension notification will be looped. become.

Also, after the second erasing effect is executed, the second specific display 003AK003 may remain displayed in the display area 003AK002. In this case, the second specific display 003AK003 may continue to be displayed until the elimination effect for the target of the continuous notification on hold is executed. By doing so, the control load for changing the specific display can be reduced.

As shown in FIGS. 13-9 and 13-10, by executing a clearing effect of erasing the specific display in the variable display targeted for the continuous on-hold notification, the variable display targeted for execution of the continuous on-hold notification becomes easier to understand. . In addition, since the erasing effect is executed when the specific display is erased, it becomes clear that the specific display has been erased, and the sense of incongruity caused by erasing the specific display can be reduced. Also, the variable display corresponding to the specific display becomes clear, and a game machine that is easy for the player to understand can be provided.

It should be noted that the effect mode of continuous continuous notification on hold shown in FIG. and the specific display should be able to notify that there is an on-hold hit. Further, the change effect may be any effect that indicates that the display mode of the specific display is changed, and the erasing effect may be any effect that is executed when the specific display is erased. As long as it is such an effect, each effect may be an arbitrary effect executed by the effect device such as the image display device 5, sound, lamp, action of a character, or the like.

For example, when it is possible to execute a hold change effect that changes the display mode of the hold display (or active display) in a time saving state after the end of the big win game state to a mode with a high degree of expectation controlled to be in an advantageous state (big hit/minor win) 3, a change effect for changing the specific display and a pending change effect may be started in the same or similar manner, and an effect in which either the specific display or the hold display changes as a result of the effect may be executable. By doing so, there are cases where the specific display changes and the reserved display changes after starting with the same or similar production, so an unexpected production can be executed. When executing such an identical or similar effect, it is preferable to set the rate of change of the reserved display higher than the rate of change of the specific display. By doing so, it is possible to increase the degree of surprise when the specific display changes after starting with the same or similar presentation. Conversely, the change effect for changing the specific display and the pending change effect may be executed in different modes. Also, some may start in the same or similar manner, while others may be executed in a different manner. By doing so, the presentation becomes diverse and the interest is improved.

Also, for example, in the change effect shown in FIG. However, while the first specific display 003AK001 is displayed in the display area 003AK002, after the effect is executed such that the effect image flies to the display area 003AK002, the display changes to the second specific display 003AK003. A change effect that does (or does not change) may be executed.

13-8(G) and the erasing effect shown in FIG. A similar effect that is enlarged and displayed in the center of is executed, and then branches to a change effect or an erasure effect. By doing so, when the first specific display 003AK001 is enlarged and displayed in the center of the image display device 5, a change effect that increases the degree of advantage is executed, or the change can be a hit. A player pays attention to whether the notified erasing performance is executed, and the interest in the game is improved. In the above embodiment, the execution timing of the change effect and the elimination effect are different, but they may be executed at the same timing. By doing so, it becomes difficult to know whether to branch to the changing effect or the erasing effect, and the attraction of the effect can be improved.

It should be noted that it is not limited to executing the same effect in the introduction portion of the change effect and the erasing effect, and it may be possible to clearly distinguish between them, or to provide a clearly distinguishable pattern. Also, the effect mode may be changed according to the execution timing of the change effect or the erasing effect. For example, when the change effect or the elimination effect is executed at timings in which the execution timings do not overlap, the effect may be executed in such a manner that it is known which one will be executed. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the player from having unnecessarily high expectations.

(Modified example of characteristic part 003AK)
This characteristic portion is not limited to this embodiment, and various modifications and applications are possible, and further characteristics may be added. Moreover, not all of the configurations described in the above embodiments are essential configurations, and some of them may be omitted. Also, this characteristic portion and another characteristic portion may be combined as appropriate.

Although only one specific display is displayed in the above embodiment, a plurality of specific displays may be displayed at the same time. For example, when the degree of advantage of the winning type is indicated by the display mode of the specific display, the number of pending hits may be indicated by the number of specific displays.

In the above-described embodiment, it is determined whether or not to execute the change effect based on the hold information (the number of hold information to be hit) at the time of execution of the hold continuous notification (step 003AKS007 in FIG. 13-1). On the other hand, it may be determined whether or not to execute the change effect based on the newly stored hold information while the hold continuous notification is executed and the specific display is displayed.

FIG. 13-11 is a flow chart showing an example of a change effect setting process in a modification in which it is determined whether or not to execute a change effect based on the hold information newly stored while the specific display is being displayed. . In the change effect setting process shown in FIG. 13-11, the same step numbers are assigned to the same processes as in the change effect setting process shown in FIG. 13-6, and the description thereof is omitted. In the change effect setting process shown in FIGS. 13-11 of the modified example, in addition to the process of determining whether or not to execute the change effect of the fake, it is also determined whether or not to execute the change effect for changing the specific display.

Specifically, steps 003AKS041 to step 003AKS043 are added. As shown in FIG. 13-11, the specific display is displayed in the first mode (step 003AKS021; Yes), and when the specific display does not change in this variable display (step 003AKS022; No), the effect control With reference to the hold information storage area, it is determined whether or not the number of hits within the hold has increased after the continuous hold notification (step 003AKS042). In step 003AKS042, for example, the number of hold information at the time of continuous hold notification is stored, and the newly stored hold information is specified from the number of fluctuations executed after that, and the hit hold information is among them. Determine whether or not If the on-hold hits have not increased after the on-hold consecutive notification (step 003AKS041; No), the process proceeds to step 003AKS023 to determine whether or not to execute the change effect of the false.

If the number of hits within the hold has increased after the notification of the consecutive holds (step 003AKS041; Yes), the specific display of the first mode during the display is changed to the second mode by executing a change effect during the current variation. Settings are made (step 003AKS042). Based on the performance control data corresponding to the change performance, control for executing the change performance is performed. Then, the "notification target" of the pending information corresponding to the increased pending hit in the pending information storage area for effect control is updated (step 003AKS043), and the change effect setting process is terminated.

In this way, in the modified example, it is possible to execute a change effect based on the stored hold information after executing the continuous hold notification, so it is possible to flexibly execute the change effect according to the status of the start winning after the continuous hold notification. , it is possible to increase the execution opportunities of the change production.

The details of processing, determination ratios, and methods of determining various effects in the flow charts shown in the above embodiments and modifications are merely examples, and the same effects as in the above embodiments can be achieved, and the effects shown in the above embodiments can be achieved. It is optional as long as it can be suitably executed.

(Description of means related to characteristic part 003AK)
(1) The game machine according to the characteristic part 003AK is
A game machine (for example, a pachinko game machine 1 according to the characteristic part 003AK) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a big win game state, a small win game state) that is advantageous to a player,
A pending storage means (for example, a pending information storage area for effect control) capable of storing information related to variable display as pending information;
When controlled to the advantageous state, a notification effect (for example, continuous notification on hold) for notifying that the hold information corresponding to the control to the advantageous state is stored in the hold storage means can be executed. Production execution means (for example, step 003AKS004, production control CPU 120 that executes the processing of step 003AKS010),
A specific display means (for example, a production control CPU 120 that executes the processing of step 003AKS010) that can display a specific display when the notification production is executed,
The specific display means is
A plurality of types of display including at least a first mode (eg, first specified display 003AK001) and a second mode (eg, second specified display 003AK003) that is more advantageous for the player than the first mode. can be represented by any of the aspects,
The specific display of the first mode can be displayed based on the satisfaction of the first condition (for example, determination of Yes in step 003AKS003), and the satisfaction of a second condition different from the first condition. It is possible to display the specific display of the second mode based on (for example, that there are multiple pending hits in step 003AKS007 and that it is determined as Yes in step 003AKS041),
When the specific display of the first mode is displayed and the second condition is satisfied, a change effect (for example, a figure) that changes the specific display from the first mode to the second mode 13-8(G) to (I)).
According to such a configuration, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the specific display, thereby improving the amusement of the game.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above,
The specific display may be continuously displayed (for example, FIGS. 13-8 to 13-10) until the variable display corresponding to the specific display is executed.
According to such a configuration, it becomes easy to understand the execution target of the notification effect, and the interest in the game is improved.

(3) In the gaming machine of (1) or (2) above,
A specific display may be erased at any of a plurality of timings in the variable display corresponding to the specific display (eg, FIG. 13-4).
According to such a configuration, it becomes easy to understand the execution target of the notification effect, the variation of the effect becomes abundant, and the amusement of the game is improved.

(4) In any one of the gaming machines (1) to (3) above,
Elimination effect executing means (for example, effect control CPU 120 for executing the erasing effect process of FIG. 13-7) for executing a specific display erasing effect (for example, erasing effect) when erasing the specific display may be provided.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to reduce discomfort when erasing the specific display.

(5) In any one of the gaming machines (1) to (4) above,
A notification performance limiting means (for example, a performance control CPU 120 that executes the processing of step 003AKS003) is provided for limiting the execution of the notification performance for at least the suspension information that is the upper limit number of suspension information that can be stored in the suspension storage means. You may do so.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the display period of the specific display becomes long and the player is given a pause.

(6) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (5) above,
The second condition is that a plurality of pieces of hold information corresponding to being controlled to the advantageous state are stored in the hold storage means (for example, there are a plurality of hits within the hold at step 003AKS007, and Yes at step 003AKS041). It may be established by determining that
According to such a configuration, after the notification effect is executed, the game may be controlled to be in an advantageous state a plurality of times, thereby improving the interest of the game.

(7) In any one of the gaming machines (1) to (6) above,
The specific display means, when displaying the specific display, is capable of executing the change effect based on the fact that the second condition is satisfied (for example, that there are a plurality of hits within the reserve at step 003AKS007). can be
According to such a configuration, it is possible to suitably execute the change effect.

(8) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (6) above,
After displaying the specific display of the first mode, the specific display means can execute the change effect based on the satisfaction of the second condition (for example, determination of Yes in step 003AKS041). You may do so.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to suitably execute the change effect.

(9) In any one of the gaming machines (1) to (8) above,
There may be a plurality of execution timings of the change effect (for example, FIG. 13-5).
According to such a configuration, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the timing at which the change effect is executed, and the interest in the game is improved.

(10) In any one of the gaming machines (1) to (9) above,
Suggesting that the specific display changes from the first mode to the second mode, it is possible to execute a pseudo-change effect (for example, fake change effect) that does not change in the first mode (for example, the process of step 003AKS025 executable).
According to such a configuration, it is possible to effectively prompt whether or not to change from the first mode to the second mode, thereby improving the amusement of the game.

(Description of means related to characteristic part 004AK)
Feature 003AK includes feature 004AK.
(1) The game machine according to the characteristic part 004AK is
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the characteristic part 004AK (003AK)) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a big win game state, a small win game state) that is advantageous to a player,
A pending storage means (for example, a pending information storage area for effect control) capable of storing information related to variable display as pending information;
When controlled to the advantageous state, a notification effect (for example, continuous notification on hold) for notifying that the hold information corresponding to the control to the advantageous state is stored in the hold storage means can be executed. Production execution means (for example, step 003AKS004, production control CPU 120 that executes the processing of step 003AKS010),
Specific display means (for example, effect control CPU 120 that executes the process of step 003AKS010) capable of displaying a specific display when the notification effect is executed;
In the variable display corresponding to the specific display, erasing effect executing means (for example, effect control CPU 120 for executing the erasing effect process of FIG. 13-7) capable of executing a specific display erasing effect (for example, erasing effect) for erasing the specific display and
The specific display means divides the specific display into at least a first mode (e.g., first specific display 003AK001) and a second mode (e.g., second specific display 003AK003) that is more advantageous to the player than the first mode. It can be displayed in any one of a plurality of display modes including
The erasing effect executing means executes the specific display erasing effect in different execution modes for the first mode specific display and the second mode specific display (for example, FIGS. 13-9 and 13-10). .
According to such a configuration, it is possible to execute the specific display erasing effect suitable for the degree of advantage for the player, the effect of the specific display erasing effect can be enhanced, and the amusement is improved.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above,
The specific display may be continuously displayed (for example, FIGS. 13-8 to 13-10) until the variable display corresponding to the specific display is executed.
According to such a configuration, it becomes easy to understand the execution target of the notification effect, and the interest in the game is improved.

(3) In the gaming machine of (1) or (2) above,
A specific display may be erased at any of a plurality of timings in the variable display corresponding to the specific display (eg, FIG. 13-4).
According to such a configuration, it becomes easy to understand the execution target of the notification effect, the variation of the effect becomes abundant, and the amusement of the game is improved.

(4) In any one of the gaming machines (1) to (3) above,
A notification performance limiting means (for example, a performance control CPU 120 that executes the processing of step 003AKS003) is provided for limiting the execution of the notification performance for at least the suspension information that is the upper limit number of suspension information that can be stored in the suspension storage means. You may do so.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the display period of the specific display becomes long and the player is given a pause.

(Description on Characteristic Portion 010AK)
Next, feature 010AK will be described. When the pachinko game machine 1 of the characteristic part 010AK is controlled to an advantageous state (a small winning game state controlled to a big winning game state or a V winning game state), a hold corresponding to being controlled to an advantageous state It is possible to execute a notification effect (hold continuous notification) that notifies that information is stored (that there is a big hit in the hold, that the reservation will be held), and when the notification effect is executed, a specific display ( a specific display means capable of displaying a display indicating that pending information corresponding to being controlled in an advantageous state is stored; and an erasing effect executing means capable of executing a display erasing effect (erasing effect). By executing such an erasing effect, it becomes easy to understand the target of the continuous notification on hold. In addition, since the specific display is continuously displayed until the erasing performance is executed, it is possible to continuously notify that there is a pending jackpot.

In the characteristic portion 010AK, if the specific display is not erased at a predetermined timing due to the occurrence of a predetermined event while the specific display is being displayed, the specific display is displayed at a specific timing after the predetermined timing. Special control to erase can be executed. That is, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the feature part 010AK, when the specific display is not erased at the predetermined timing due to the occurrence of a predetermined event such as a problem, the specific display is erased at the specific timing. It is possible to prevent the player from feeling distrustful of the player by continuing to display the specific display despite being controlled to the advantageous state to be notified. As a result, it is possible to suitably execute the continuous notification of holding.

Characteristic portions of the pachinko gaming machine 1 having the feature 010AK will be described below. For other parts that are not described here, the configuration of the pachinko game machine 1 described in the basic description above and the configuration of other characteristic portions may be appropriately adopted.

First, the operation of the pachinko game machine 1 having the feature 010AK will be described. FIG. 14-1 is a flow chart showing the operation of the holding continuous notification process for executing the holding continuous notification of the feature part 010AK in the jackpot game state. The continuous pending notification process is executed within the big hit effect process in step S176 of FIG. In the suspension continuous notification process, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not it is time to execute the suspension continuous notification (step 010AKS001). If it is determined that it is not time to execute the continuous notification on hold (step 010AKS001; No), the continuous notification setting process on hold is terminated.

The execution timing of the continuous suspension notification may be set to any timing from the start to the end of the advantageous state. In this embodiment, it is in the middle of the predetermined round (for example, the 4th round, etc.) in the jackpot game state. At step 010AKS001, for example, it is determined whether or not it is time to start round 4. Note that there may be a plurality of types of execution timing and one of them may be determined. Further, the execution timing and the determination ratio of the execution timing may differ depending on the jackpot type in the jackpot game state under control and the jackpot type in the hold.

The execution timing of the holding continuous notification may be during a small hit game state in which the game ball can win a prize in the V judgment prize winning device 87 as shown in FIG. 12-1. That is, the continuous suspension notification may be executed during the small winning game state in which the V prize can be won as an advantageous state. In addition, although the advantageous state has not actually started, the interval until the advantageous state starts after the decorative symbols are aligned in a winning combination, or the variable display controlled to the advantageous state (for example, execution pending The pending continuous notification may be executed during variable display of the continuous notification target. In addition, in order to prevent the occurrence frequency of short-term jackpots from becoming excessive, if an interval is set before the start of an advantageous state after the combination of decorative patterns has been completed, the interval may be used to notify the player of the pending continuous notification. By executing, it is possible to prevent the performance from being slowed down and the interest from being lowered.

When it is determined that it is time to execute the continuous notification on hold (step 010AKS001; Yes), the continuous notification on hold flag indicating that the continuous notification on hold is being executed and the specific display is being displayed (during continuous notification on hold) is ON. (Step 010AKS002). In this embodiment, in response to the execution of the on-hold continuous notification, a specific display indicating that there is a hit within the on-hold is continuously displayed until the hit to be notified occurs. If the on-hold continuous notification flag is ON in response to such a specific display being displayed (step 010AKS002; Yes), the continuous-hold notification setting process is terminated and a new continuous on-hold notification is executed. do not.

It should be noted that a new hold continuous notification may be executed while the specific display is being displayed. In such a case, the specific display may be newly displayed or the display mode of the specific display may be changed in response to the execution of the new continuous-on-hold notification.

If the pending continuous notification flag is off (step 010AKS002; No), the pending information (second pending information) of the currently stored pending numbers 1 to 3 will hit (small hit or big hit). It is determined whether or not there is (step 010AKS003).

The effect control CPU 120 produces the information based on, for example, receiving from the main board 11 an effect control command for designating the generation of the starting prize or an effect control command for designating the judgment result of the look-ahead judgment. As suspension information for control, it is stored in a predetermined area of RAM 122 (a storage area for suspension information for effect control). FIG. 14-2 shows an example of the pending information storage area for effect control. As shown in FIG. 14-2, the "holding number" corresponding to the storage order of the holding information and the "display result" specified from the effect control command for designating the judgment result of the prefetch judgment are associated and held. stored as information. The pending information with the pending number 0 in FIG. 14B is the pending information corresponding to the variable display being executed. Further, each piece of hold information is stored in association with information that can specify that it is a "notification target" of the hold series notification. Information other than these (for example, variation pattern information, etc.) may be associated and stored as the pending information. In the production control pending information storage area, new pending information is stored within the range of the upper limit number (4) each time a new start winning is generated, and each time the variable display ends or starts, a pending number The hold information of 0 is erased, and the hold information after the hold number 1 is shifted to the hold number one lower and updated.

In FIG. 14-2, the variable display being executed is a small win, and in the jackpot game state via the small win, it shows that the hold continuous notification is executed for the hold information of the hold numbers 2 and 3. . In addition, in the example shown in FIG. 14-2, it is assumed that the hit type (including the hit type in which a big hit occurs via a small hit) as shown in FIG. 12-2.

In the processing of step 010AKS003, it may be determined whether or not the second pending information of the pending numbers 1 to 3 contains the pending information with the winning display result by referring to the effect control pending information storage area.

In addition, the pending|holding information storage area for production|presentation control should just be provided with the pending|holding information corresponding to a 1st special figure, and the pending|holding information corresponding to a 2nd special figure. The reservation information storage area for effect control shown in FIG. 14-2 corresponds to the second special figure.

Since the variable display of the second special figure is executed with priority over the variable display of the first special figure, the game usually progresses by the variable display of the second special figure in the high base state after the end of the jackpot game state. be done. Therefore, in this embodiment, as a target of the continuous notification of suspension, the continuous notification of suspension is executed for the second suspension information corresponding to the second special figure (winning to the second start winning opening). Therefore, in step 010AKS003, it is determined whether or not there is any hit in the second reservation information. It should be noted that, although omitted in the figure, when it becomes a big hit in the normal state, because it is assumed that there is no or less number of second pending information, in this embodiment high base state (time saving state) In the case of a big hit, the holding continuous notification is executed in the big win game state (advantageous state). It should be noted that, regardless of the gaming state, the continuous suspension notification may be executed.

Moreover, you may make it perform a reservation continuous notification about the 1st reservation information corresponding to a 1st special figure (a prize to a 1st starting prize-winning opening). For example, when the jackpot is achieved in the normal state, continuous suspension notification may be executed for the first suspension information. In this case, the effect mode of the continuous on-hold notification may be different from the effect mode of the continuous on-hold notification for the second on-hold information.

Up to four pieces of second hold information can be stored, and in this embodiment, the second hold information of hold numbers 1 to 3 can be subjected to continuous hold notification. Therefore, in step 010AKS003, it is determined whether or not there is a hit in the second hold information of the hold numbers 1 to 3, not all the hold numbers.

For example, in a state where four pieces of the second hold information are stored, when only the hold number 4 is the hold information that becomes a hit, when the hold continuous notification is executed for the hold number 4, the jackpot game state ends. After that, the variable display of the second special figure will be executed three times before the variable display that becomes the hit that actually becomes the hold continuous notification is executed. In the case of the longest time (for example, two minutes) of the variable display time that can be selected by these three variable displays, the longest time until the variable display that becomes a big win is started after the big win game state in which the continuous notification of suspension is executed is ended. It takes about 6 minutes, and it takes about 8 minutes at the longest until the jackpot game state is reached. In this way, in order to prevent the process from becoming redundant until the big hit corresponding to the continuous on-hold notification despite the execution of the on-hold consecutive notification, in this embodiment, the on-hold information of the on-hold number 4 is It is excluded from the subject of continuous notification on hold. As a result, it is possible to prevent the effect from being delayed after the continuous notification of the holding, and to prevent the interest from being lowered.

In addition, it is not limited to excluding the hold information of the hold number 4 from the target of the continuous hold notification. It may be excluded from continuous notification. In addition, hold information with a hold number of 2 or less may be excluded from continuous hold notification. For example, a variation pattern (variation time) corresponding to each piece of hold information may be read in advance, and depending on the variation time, it may be determined which hold information is to be subjected to continuous hold notification. For example, even hold information for which the total fluctuation time corresponding to the stored hold information is within a specific range may be subject to continuous hold notification. In this way, according to the variable time corresponding to the stored hold information, it is possible to secure the execution opportunity of the continuous hold notification while preventing the delay of the performance after the continuous hold notification. Hold continuous notification can be executed.

If there is no hit in the currently stored second hold information of hold numbers 1 to 3 (step 010AKS003; No), the hold continuous notification setting process is terminated. If there is a hit (small hit or big hit) in the second hold information of the currently stored hold numbers 1 to 3 (step 010AKS003; Yes), it is determined whether to execute the hold continuous notification ( step 010AKS004).

At step 010AKS004, for example, it is determined (determined) whether or not to execute continuous hold notification at the rate shown in FIG. 14-3(A). As shown in FIG. 14-3(A), at step 010AKS004, 30% of the decisions are made to execute the continuous notification on hold, and 70% of the decisions are made to not execute the continuous notification on hold. In addition, depending on the number of hits in the hold, whether the hit in the hold is a big hit or a small hit, and the hit type (number of rounds, presence or absence of variable probability control and time saving control, etc.), etc. You can let Also, the execution determination ratio may be any ratio as long as it is possible to suitably execute the continuous on-hold notification.

Subsequently, it is determined whether or not it is determined in step 010AKS004 that the continuous notification on hold is to be executed (step 010AKS005). If it is determined not to execute the continuous on-hold notification (step 010AKS005; No), the continuous on-hold notification setting process is terminated.

If it is determined to execute the continuous on-hold notification (step 010AKS005; Yes), a specific display pattern corresponding to the mode of specific display displayed in response to the execution of the continuous on-hold notification is determined (step 010AKS006).

In this embodiment, a first mode and a second mode indicating that there are a plurality of pending hits are provided as display modes of the specific display. Therefore, the specific display of the second mode is more advantageous for the player than the specific display of the first mode. In this way, by providing the second mode indicating that there are a plurality of hits within the reserve, it is possible to notify that multiple hits will be achieved with one notification, and the player can display the specific display in the second mode. As a result, the interest in directing increases.

In this embodiment, as the specific display patterns, a specific display pattern A that displays the specific display in the first mode and a specific display pattern B that displays the specific display in the second mode are provided.

At step 010KS006, the specific display pattern is determined according to the ratio shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 14-3(B), in step 010AKS006, if there is one hold hit for execution of hold continuous notification, specific display pattern A is determined, When there are two or more inner hits, the specific display pattern A is determined at a rate of 20%, and the specific display pattern B is determined at a rate of 80%. By doing so, when the specific display is displayed in the second mode, it is possible to notify that there are two or more pending hits. Further, even when there are two or more hits in the reserved state, the specific display pattern A may be determined. Therefore, even when the specific display is displayed in the first mode, there may be two or more pending hits, so it is possible to reduce the disappointment of the player when the specific display is displayed in the first mode. .

In addition, this determination ratio is an example, the number of pending hits including those not subject to continuous pending notification, whether the pending hit to be executed for continuous pending notification is a big hit or a small hit, the hit type (number of rounds , the presence or absence of variable probability control and time saving control, etc.), etc., the determination ratio of the specific display pattern may be varied. That is, the degree of advantage other than the number of wins may be suggested by the display mode of the specific display. Also, the determined ratio may be any ratio as long as the specific display can be preferably displayed.

Further, as the display mode of the specific display, another display mode having a different degree of advantage from the first mode and the second mode may be provided. A changing effect that changes may be made executable.

After the specific display pattern is determined in step 010AKS006, the image display device 5 or the like executes the holding continuous notification, and after the execution of the holding continuous notification, depending on the determination result in step 010AKS006, the specific display is changed to the first mode or Settings are made for displaying in the display area of the image display device 5 in the second mode (step 010AKS007). Concretely, the effect control data for executing the continuous notification on hold is read, and the continuous notification on hold is executed based on the effect control data. Then, when the specific display pattern A is determined in step 010AKS006, the specific display is displayed in the first mode, and when the specific display pattern B is determined, the control is performed to display the specific display in the second mode. conduct. Further, the RAM 122 is provided with a specific display mode storage area for storing information capable of specifying the display mode of the specific mode being displayed. 2 mode) is stored in the specific display mode storage area.

After that, according to the determination result in step 010AKS004, the "notification target" of the pending information in the pending information storage area for effect control shown in FIG. 14-2 is updated (step 010AKS008). Specifically, information (flag, etc.) indicating that continuous on-hold notification is to be executed is stored in the "notification target" of the on-hold information determined to be to be continuously on-hold notification in step 010AKS004.

Subsequently, the holding continuous notification flag indicating that the holding continuous notification is executed and the specific display is being displayed (holding continuous notification in progress) is set to ON state (step 010AKS009), and the holding continuous notification setting process is terminated. do.

FIG. 14-4 is a timing chart showing the execution timing of the elimination effect of the characteristic portion 010AK. As shown in FIG. 14-4, when the holding continuous notification is executed in the jackpot game state (jackpot game state is ON), a specific display is displayed (specific display is ON).

After that, when the jackpot game state ends, variation (variable display) is executed (variation is ON) based on the stored hold information. If the variation is the subject variation of the continuous notification on hold, the erasing effect is executed in the variation (variation subject to the continuous notification on suspension). In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 14-4, as the execution timing (erasure timing) of the erasing effect, the timing TA immediately after the start of the variation, the timing TB at the start of the normal reach (when the left and right symbols are aligned), and the development of the super reach. A later timing TC is provided.

In this embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 determines the execution timing of the erasing effect based on the effect control command received from the main board 11 at the start of the variation of the pending continuous notification target variation. At the start of the fluctuation, as shown in FIG. 14-4, the background designation command (here the second time saving state designation command), the fluctuation special figure designation command (here the second pattern fluctuation designation command), the display result designation command, the fluctuation pattern A plurality of production control commands such as designated commands are transmitted. Then, in this embodiment, the execution timing of the erasing effect is determined based on the presence or absence of the effect specified from the variation pattern and the variation time.

In this way, when the command is normally received at the start of variation and the effect control CPU 120 executes normal processing, any one of the timings TA, TB, and TC is determined as the execution timing of the erasing effect. However, if the command cannot be received normally, or if the execution timing of the erasing effect is not determined normally due to the occurrence of some event (predetermined event) such as an error on the effect control board 12 side, the pending continuous notification target There is a risk that the specific display will remain displayed without executing the erasing effect in the variation.

When such an abnormality occurs (when a predetermined event occurs), the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the characteristic part 010AK receives a small win start designation command (also called a fanfare command) as shown in FIG. 14-4. , the specific display is erased at the timing TD during the big win game state of the big win via the small win.

That is, when the small win start designation command is received and the specific display is still displayed without execution of the erasing performance despite the fact that the small win is subject to the continuous notification of suspension, the specific display is still displayed at the timing TD. Clear the display. By doing so, even when the erasing effect is not executed normally, the specific display can be suitably erased. In addition, the player is prevented from misunderstanding that the specific display has not been erased and the right to win still remains despite the small win (big win via small win) that is the target of the continuous notification of suspension. can be prevented.

Incidentally, when the symbol jackpot is achieved without going through the small jackpot, the specific display may be erased at the timing TD based on the reception of the jackpot start designation command.

As shown in FIG. 14-4, the specific display erasing timing TD (specific timing) when a predetermined event occurs is a timing later than the specific display erasing timings TA to TC (predetermined timings) during normal operation. . By doing so, it is possible to prevent the specific display from being erased at the specific timing even though the predetermined timing at which the erasing effect can be executed still remains, and giving a sense of incompatibility.

FIG. 14-5(A) is a flow chart showing the operation of the elimination effect setting process. The erasing effect setting process is executed within the variable display start setting process in step S171 of FIG. 7 during variable display. The erasing effect setting process is a process for determining the execution timing of the erasing effect in the case of a change (win) for erasing a specific display.

In the erasing effect setting process shown in FIG. 14-5(A), the effect control CPU 120 first checks whether or not the variation pattern designation command is received from the main board 11 by checking the received command buffer of the RAM 122. Determine (step 010AKS021). If the variation pattern designation command is not received (step 010AKS021; No), the erasing effect setting process is terminated.

If the variation pattern specification command is received (step 010AKS021; Yes), it is determined whether or not the flag during continuous notification of holding is in the ON state (step 010AKS022). When the pending continuous notification flag is OFF (step 010AKS022; No), the erasing effect setting process is terminated.

If the pending continuous notification flag is ON (step 010AKS022; Yes), by checking the pending number 0 in the pending information storage area for effect control, whether or not the current change is the target of the continuous pending notification. (Step 010AKS023). If it is not the subject of the continuous reservation notification (step 010AKS023; No), the erasing effect setting process is terminated.

If it is a target of continuous suspension notification (step 010AKS023; Yes), the execution timing of the erasing effect is determined based on the variation pattern specified from the received variation pattern designation command (step 010AKS024).

In step 010AKS024, the execution timing of the erasing effect is determined according to the variation pattern, for example, at the rate shown in FIG. 14-5(B). In this embodiment, as a winning variation pattern to be the target of the pending continuous notification, for example, as shown in FIG. ), a variation pattern B in which winning patterns are aligned after normal reach, and a variation pattern C in which winning patterns are aligned after super reach performance is executed after normal reach.

As shown in FIGS. 14-5(B) and 14-5(C), the variation pattern A has a short variation time, and is a variation pattern in which the variation ends before reaching the timing TB shown in FIG. 14-4, for example. Therefore, when the variation pattern is variation pattern A, the 100% timing TA is determined.

Further, the variation pattern B has an intermediate variation time, and is a variation pattern in which the variation ends after reaching the timing TB shown in FIG. 14-4 and before reaching the timing TC, for example. Therefore, when the variation pattern is variation pattern B, timing TA is determined 50% of the time, and timing TB is determined 50% of the time.

Further, the fluctuation pattern C has a long fluctuation time, and is a fluctuation pattern in which the fluctuation ends after reaching the timing TC shown in FIG. 14-4, for example. Therefore, when the variation pattern is variation pattern C, timing TA is determined 50% of the time, timing TB is determined 25% of the time, and timing TC is determined 25% of the time.

As described above, in this embodiment, the execution timing is determined to be able to execute the elimination effect corresponding to the variation pattern. As a result, it is possible to execute the erasing effect at a suitable execution timing. In addition, the number of hits in the hold, whether the hit in the hold targeted for the execution of the hold consecutive notification is a big hit or a small hit, the hit type (number of rounds, presence or absence of variable probability control and time saving control, etc.) Erasure production according to may be made different from each other. Also, the determination ratio may be any ratio as long as it is possible to suitably perform the erasing effect.

Subsequently, a setting is made to execute the erasing effect at the execution timing determined at step 010AKS024 (step 010AKS025). In step 010AKS025, for example, at the execution timing (timing TA, TB, or TC) determined in step 010AKS024, the effect control data for executing the erasing effect is read, and effect control based on the effect control data is started. do. After that, the erasing effect setting process is terminated.

FIG. 14-6 is a flow chart showing the operation of the elimination effect process. The erasure effect process is executed within the effect process during variable display in step S172 of FIG. 7 during variable display. The erasing effect process is a process for executing an erasing effect in accordance with the display mode of the specific display at the erasing timing of the specific display determined in the erasing effect setting process of FIG. 14-5(A).

In the erasing effect process shown in FIG. 14-6, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether it is time to execute the erasing effect based on the result of determining the erasing timing in the erasing effect setting process and the elapsed time from the start of variation. is determined (step 010AKS031). In step 010AKS031, if the current change is the notification target of the pending continuous notification and the erasing timing is determined in the erasing effect setting process, it is determined whether or not the erasing timing (timing TA, TB or TC) has come. judge. If it is not the time to execute the erasing effect (step 010AKS031; No), the erasing effect process is terminated.

If it is time to execute the erasing effect (step 010AKS031; Yes), it is determined whether or not the specific display is displayed in the first mode by referring to the specific display mode storage area (step 010AKS032).

When the specific display is displayed in the first mode (step 010AKS032; Yes), the image display device 5 is set to execute a first clear effect as a clear effect for clearing the specific display (step 010AKS033). At step 010AKS033, control for executing the first elimination effect is performed based on the effect control data corresponding to the first elimination effect. As a result, the specific display is erased.

After that, the on-hold continuous notification flag is reset to the off state (step 010AKS034).

When the specific display is not displayed in the first mode (step 010AKS032; No), that is, when the specific display is displayed in the second mode, the image display device 5 performs the second erasing effect for erasing the specific display. A setting for executing the erasing effect is performed (step 010AKS035). At step 010AKS035, control for executing the second elimination effect is performed based on the effect control data corresponding to the second elimination effect.

Thus, in this embodiment, the first erasing effect is executed when the specific display is displayed in the first mode, and the first erasing effect is executed when the specific display is displayed in the second mode. A different second elimination effect is executed. For example, since the second erasing effect is executed in a situation more advantageous to the player than the first erasing effect, the mode is more flashy than the first erasing effect, the more intense mode, or the mode with a greater amount of effect (volume, amount of light, etc.). may be executed with By doing so, it is possible to execute the erasing effect in accordance with the degree of advantage for the player, the effect of the erasing effect can be enhanced, and the amusement is improved.

Thus, in this embodiment, the effect mode of the erasing effect is varied according to the display mode of the specific display, but the same erasing effect may be executed regardless of the display mode of the specific display, or It may be arranged that an erasing effect is executed in some cases. In addition, the effect mode of the erasing effect may be varied according to other conditions such as execution timing of the erasing effect.

In this embodiment, when the second erasing effect is executed, the specific display in the second mode is erased, but the specific display in the first mode is displayed again. Therefore, after executing the process of step 010AKS035, display setting is performed to display the specific display in the first mode in the display area of the image display device 5 (step 010AKS036).

After executing the processing of step 010AKS034 or step 010AKS036, the erasing effect completed flag indicating that the erasing effect has been executed in this variable display is set to ON state (step 010AKS037), and the erasing effect setting process is terminated. do.

When the erasing timing is normally determined in the erasing effect setting process of FIG. , an erasing effect for erasing the specific display is executed.

On the other hand, if a variation pattern specification command is missed, if a normal command cannot be received due to noise etc., a processing error in the erasing effect setting process, erasing effect cannot be executed by mistake for the variation pattern When a predetermined event such as when it is determined at the erasing timing (for example, when it is determined at the timing TB or TC for the variation pattern A) occurs and the erasing timing is not determined, or when the erasing effect is normally executed If the specific display is not erased without the above, the specific display is erased by executing the second erasing effect setting process shown in FIG. will be

In the second erasing effect setting process shown in FIG. 14-7, the effect control CPU 120 first confirms the received command buffer of the RAM 122 and receives a winning start designation command (small winning start designation command, big winning start designation command) from the main board 11. It is determined whether or not a start designation command) has been received (step 010AKS041). If the winning start designation command has not been received (step 010AKS041; No), the second elimination effect setting process is terminated.

If the hit start designation command is received (step 010AKS041; Yes), by confirming the hold number 0 of the hold information storage area for effect control, etc., the variation executed this time (hit this time) is the hold continuous notification It is determined whether or not it is an object to be notified (step 010AKS042). If it is not the target of the continuous reservation notification (step 010AKS042; No), the second erasing effect setting process is terminated.

If it is the notification target of the pending continuous notification (step 010AKS042; Yes), it is determined whether or not the elimination effect completed flag indicating that the elimination effect has been executed in the variation executed this time is in the ON state (step 010AKS043). ). If the erased effect completed flag is ON (step 010AKS043; Yes), it means that the erased effect is executed normally in the change of the notification target of the current holding continuous notification, so the erased effect completed flag is reset to the OFF state. Then (step 010AKS044), the second elimination effect setting process is terminated.

If the erasing effect completed flag is off (step 010AKS043; No), it means that the erasing effect is not normally executed in the change of the notification target of the current pending continuous notification, so the jackpot game state (jackpot via small win ), a setting is made for executing the erasing effect at the timing TD (step 010AKS045). In this way, the control of erasing the specific display based on the reception of the hit start designation command when the erasing effect is not normally executed in the change of the notification target of the pending continuous notification is also called specific control.

Thereafter, by referring to the specific display mode storage area, it is determined whether or not the specific display is displayed in the first mode (step 010AKS046). When the specific display is displayed in the first mode (step 010AKS046; Yes), the pending continuous notification flag is reset to the off state (step 010AKS047), and the second erasing effect setting process is terminated.

If the specific display is not displayed in the first mode (step 010AKS046; No), that is, if the specific display is displayed in the second mode, the specific display is displayed in the first mode in the display area of the image display device 5. A display setting is made to do so (step 010AKS048), and the second elimination effect setting process is terminated. As described above, when the specific display is displayed in the second mode and the erasing effect is not executed normally, the second mode is executed in the same manner as when the normal erasing effect is executed. Control is performed to change the specific display to the first mode. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable or distrustful due to the continuous display of the specific display of the second mode that is advantageous to the player.

Next, an example of the performance operation of the characteristic portion 010AK will be described. FIG. 14-8 shows an effect operation example in the case where the holding continuous notification is executed in the jackpot game state and the elimination effect is executed in the holding continuous notification target variation. FIG. 14-8(A) shows the image display device 5 when the jackpot is won. The image display device 5 displays a character image with pieces and the characters "big win", and the number "777" (small pattern) is displayed in the upper right part to indicate a big win (big win in pattern or big win via small win). It is shown that

After that, the first round of the jackpot game state is started. In the jackpot game state, the current round display is displayed in the upper left portion of the image display device 5, as shown in FIG. 14-8(B), for example.

In this embodiment, the fourth round in the jackpot game state is the execution timing of the pending notification. If it is determined to execute the pending continuous notification, the round in the jackpot gaming state is completed, and in the fourth round, as shown in FIG. A specific display 010AK001 (first specific display 010AK001) in the first mode showing a "V" is displayed in the center of the image display device 5 as a hold continuous notification for notifying that the user is going to continue. As shown in FIG. 14-8(D), the first specific display 010AK001 moves to the display area 010AK002 provided in the lower right portion of the image display device 5 and is displayed in a reduced size. Such display of continuous on-hold notification and specific display is executed based on the processing of step 010AKS007 in FIG. 14-1.

The first specific display 010AK001 is continuously displayed in the display area 010AK002 until at least the variable display that becomes the hit of the notification target is executed after execution of the pending continuous notification. As a result, it is possible to continuously notify that there is a win in the hold (that the game will be held in the reserve), and the variable display of the notification target becomes easy to understand.

In addition, the specific display may not always be displayed until at least the variable display that becomes the hit of the notification target is executed after the execution of the pending continuous notification, for example, a predetermined effect (notice effect or reach effect) is executed In such cases, it may be temporarily made invisible.

After that, when the big win game state ends, for example, as shown in FIG. XXXX pt") is displayed, and the jackpot game state ends.

When the jackpot game state ends, as shown in FIG. 14-8(F), in the image display device 5, variable display of decorative symbols based on the hold information is started. In FIG. 14-8(F), the downward arrow indicates that the decorative design is variably displayed in each decorative design display area.

In the case of the target variation of the pending continuous notification, for example, as shown in FIG.

For example, when it is decided to execute the erasing effect at the timing TB during this fluctuation (timing at the start of normal reach), as shown in FIG. , and is enlarged and displayed in the center of the image display device 5 .

Then, as shown in FIG. 14-8(I), the entire image display device 5 is blacked out and becomes invisible, and the first erasing effect is executed in which the first specific display 010AK001 is erased. .

After that, as shown in FIG. 14-8(I), the decoration symbol "7" is stopped in the middle decoration symbol display area, and the displayed result becomes a winning symbol. In this way, in the variable display that is the target of the continuous notification on hold, the erasing effect of erasing the specific display is executed. As a result, it is possible to execute an effect as if the specific display was digested and a win (big win) was achieved.

FIG. 14-9 shows an effect operation example in the case where the holding continuous notification is executed in the jackpot game state and the elimination effect is not executed in the holding continuous notification target variation. The rendering operations of FIGS. 14-9(A) to (G) are the same as the rendering operations of FIGS. 14-8(A) to (G). Due to the occurrence of a predetermined event (missing command, error in the effect control board 12, etc.) at the start of the pending continuous notification target fluctuation, when the execution timing of the erasing effect cannot be determined normally, in FIG. 14-9 (H) As shown, the display result is a winning symbol while the first specific display 010AK001 is displayed in the display area 010AK002 without executing the erasing effect.

After that, when a small win start designation command (fanfare command) is received, the image display device 5 displays a piece character image and the characters "big win" as shown in FIG. 14-9(I). , a number "777" (small pattern) is displayed in the upper right portion to notify that a big win (a big win via a small win) has been achieved.

Subsequently, the first round of the big hit game state is started based on the occurrence of the V winning in the small hit game state, but as shown in FIG. 010AK001 has been erased. This is the erasing effect at the timing TD.

In this embodiment, the image display device 5 is provided with a plurality of display layers, and different images can be displayed on each display layer. A display priority is set for each display layer, and an image of a display layer having a high display priority is displayed on the near side as viewed from the player. As shown in FIG. 14-9 (I), the effect (fanfare effect) for notifying that a big hit has been achieved is achieved by setting the display layer higher than the display area 010AK002, so that the display area 010AK002 (specific display) are also preferentially displayed. In this way, by erasing the specific display at the timing TD during the fanfare production when the display area 010AK002 (specific display) is hidden, the player may feel uncomfortable that the specific display is suddenly erased. can be prevented.

The specific timing for erasing the specific display when the erasing effect is not normally executed is not limited to the timing TD of the jackpot game state. For example, the specific timing may be the timing during fluctuation or the timing when the symbols are aligned. In this case, the specific timing is preferably a timing at which the specific display can be erased without feeling uncomfortable. For example, when the specific timing is fluctuating, it is preferable that the timing is later than the latest predetermined timing among the predetermined timings at which the erasing effect is executed. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the inconsistency of the performance, and to prevent the specific display from being erased regardless of the erasing performance at the stage where the erasing performance can still be executed, thereby preventing the player from feeling uncomfortable or distrustful. can.

Further, the specific timing may be the same timing as the execution timing of another effect, and the specific display may be erased during execution of the other effect. By doing so, it is possible to erase the specific display without a sense of discomfort. For example, the specific timing may be the execution timing of an effect that causes a character to move. Then, for example, in the case of displaying a role object action effect on the image display device 5 in accordance with an effect of moving a role object, the display layer of the role object action effect is set to a higher level than the specific display, and A specific display may be erased while the effect is being displayed. By doing so, it is possible to erase the specific display without discomfort during the performance of moving the character. In addition, when the specific timing is set to the jackpot game state, the specific display is erased based on the receipt of the hit designation command. The specific display may be erased based on the elapsed time of or the reception of the pattern confirmation designation command.

FIG. 14-10 shows an effect operation example when the second elimination effect is executed. In FIG. 14-10(A), the second mode specific display 010AK003 (second specific display 010AK003) indicating "W" is displayed in the display area 010AK002 of the image display device 5, and the left and right decoration pattern display areas It shows that the decoration pattern of "7" has stopped and is in the ready-to-win state.

For example, when it is decided to execute the erasing effect at the timing TB during this fluctuation, as shown in FIG. 5 is enlarged and displayed in the center.

Then, as shown in FIG. 14-10(C), an effect is displayed in which the image display device 5 is torn apart, and the second erasing effect is executed in which the second specific display 010AK003 is erased. Thus, the effect mode of the second elimination effect is different from the effect mode of the first elimination effect shown in FIG. 14-8(I).

Since the second erasing effect is executed in a situation more advantageous to the player than the first erasing effect, it is executed in a flashier mode, a more intense mode, and a mode with a greater amount of effect (volume, amount of light, etc.) than the first erasing effect. may be made. For example, the sound may not be output in the first erasing effect, and the sound may be output in the second erasing effect. Further, while the performance accessory operates in the second elimination performance, the performance accessory may not operate in the first elimination performance, or the operation amount of the performance performance accessory in the first elimination performance. may be less than the first elimination effect. By doing so, it is possible to execute a different erasing effect depending on the display mode of the specific display. Then, it is possible to execute the erasing performance in accordance with the degree of advantage of the player, to enhance the performance effect of the erasing performance, and to improve the amusement.

After that, as shown in FIG. 14-10(D), the decoration symbol "7" stops in the middle decoration symbol display area, and the display result is a big win. When the second erasing effect is executed, the second specific display 010AK003 is erased, but the first specific display 010AK001 is displayed in the display area 010AK002. As a result, the second specific display 010AK003 is erased so that an effect as if a big win has been achieved can be executed, and by redisplaying the first specific display 010AK001, the fact that there is a hit in the reserve can be continued. can be notified.

After the execution of the second erasing effect, the first specific display 010AK001 is not re-displayed, and in the subsequent advantageous state, the continuous continuous notification on hold is executed again, and in response to the continuous continuous notification on hold, the first A specific display 010AK001 may be displayed. By doing so, if a win is obtained while the second specific display 010AK003 is being displayed, the continuous suspension notification is executed again, so that the continuous suspension notification can be expected to loop. become.

As shown in FIG. 14-10, by executing the erasing effect of erasing the specific display in the variable display targeted for the continuous on-hold notification, the variable display targeted for execution of the continuous on-hold notification becomes easier to understand. In addition, since the erasing effect is executed when the specific display is erased, it becomes clear that the specific display has been erased, and the sense of incongruity caused by erasing the specific display can be reduced. Also, the variable display corresponding to the specific display becomes clear, and a game machine that is easy for the player to understand can be provided.

FIG. 14-11 shows an effect operation example in the case where the elimination effect (second elimination effect) is not executed in the pending continuous notification target change when the second specific display 010AK003 is displayed. In FIG. 14-11(A), the second mode specific display 010AK003 (second specific display 010AK003) indicating "W" is displayed in the display area 010AK002 of the image display device 5, and the left and right decoration pattern display areas It shows that the decoration pattern of "7" has stopped and is in the ready-to-win state.

Due to the occurrence of a predetermined event (missed command, error in the effect control board 12, etc.) at the start of the pending continuous notification target fluctuation, when the execution timing of the erasing effect cannot be determined normally, in FIG. 14-11 (B) As shown, the display result is a winning symbol while the second specific display 010AK003 is displayed in the display area 010AK002 without executing the erasing effect.

After that, when a small winning start designation command (fanfare command) is received, the image display device 5 displays a piece character image and the characters "big winning" as shown in FIG. 14-11(C). , a number "777" (small pattern) is displayed in the upper right portion to notify that a big win (a big win via a small win) has been achieved.

Subsequently, the first round of the jackpot game state is started, but as shown in FIG. 14-11(D), the second specific display 010AK003 in the display area 010AK002 is changed to the first specific display 010AK001. This is the second elimination effect at the timing TD.

In this way, when the second specific display 010AK003 is displayed, if the erasing effect (second erasing effect) is not executed in the pending continuous notification target variation, the second specific display 010AK003 is displayed at the timing TD. Control to change to 1 specific display 010AK001 is executed. As a result, despite being controlled to the big win game state (small win game state), the specific display of the second mode, which is an advantageous mode for the player, is continuously displayed to make the player expect excessively, It is possible to prevent the player from feeling distrustful of the player because the player is not as advantageous as expected after that.

(Modified example of characteristic portion 010AK)
This characteristic portion is not limited to this embodiment, and various modifications and applications are possible, and further characteristics may be added. Moreover, not all of the configurations described in the above embodiments are essential configurations, and some of them may be omitted. Also, this characteristic portion and another characteristic portion may be combined as appropriate. For example, a change effect related to the characteristic portion 003AK may be executed. Also, the means of the characteristic portion 003AK and the characteristic portion 004AK may be employed in the characteristic portion 010AK.

Although only one specific display is displayed in the above embodiment, a plurality of specific displays may be displayed at the same time. For example, when the degree of advantage of the winning type is indicated by the display mode of the specific display, the number of pending hits may be indicated by the number of specific displays.

The continuous notification on hold, the specific display, the erasing effect, and the effects and display modes when erasing the specific display at a specific timing in the above embodiments are examples, and the effects and display modes of each effect may be arbitrary. For example, in the above embodiment, there are a plurality of types of specific display and erasure effects, but only one type may be used.

The processing contents, determination ratios, and various effects determination methods of the flowcharts shown in the above embodiments and modifications are examples, and the same effects as those in the above embodiments can be obtained, and the effects shown in the above embodiments can be achieved. It is optional as long as it can be suitably executed.

(Description of means related to characteristic part 010AK)
(1) The game machine according to the characteristic part 010AK is
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the characteristic part 010AK) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a big win game state, a small win game state) that is advantageous to a player,
A pending storage means (for example, a pending information storage area for effect control) capable of storing information related to variable display as pending information;
When controlled to the advantageous state, a notification effect (for example, continuous notification on hold) for notifying that the hold information corresponding to the control to the advantageous state is stored in the hold storage means can be executed. Production execution means (for example, step 010AKS004, production control CPU 120 that executes the processing of step 010AKS007),
Specific display means (for example, the effect control CPU 120 that executes the processing of step 010AKS007) capable of displaying a specific display when the notification effect is executed;
At a predetermined timing (for example, timing TA, TB, or TC) of the variable display corresponding to the specific display, erasing effect execution means (for example, step 010AKS024, step 010AKS024, etc.) capable of executing a specific display erasing effect (for example, erasing effect) for erasing the specific display Effect control CPU 120) that executes the processing of step 010AKS025),
If the specific display is not erased at the predetermined timing due to the occurrence of a predetermined event (for example, a missing variation pattern command or an error in the erasing effect setting process) while the specific display is being displayed, the specific display is not erased at the predetermined timing. Special control can be executed to erase the specific display at a later specific timing (for example, timing TD) (for example, the process of step 010AKS045 can be executed).
According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling distrustful of the player due to the continuous display of the specific display, and to suitably execute the notification effect.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above,
game control means (for example, the main board 11, the game control microcomputer 100, and the CPU 103) for controlling the progress of the game;
Production control means (for example, production control board 12, production control CPU 120) for controlling production based on information from the game control means,
When the specific display is not erased at the predetermined timing, the effect control means can not normally receive information (for example, a variation pattern designation command) at the start of the variable display from the game control means, the game control The special control may be executed based on information (for example, winning start designation command) received from the means at the start of the advantageous state.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling distrustful of the player due to the continuous display of the specific display, and to suitably execute the notification effect.

(3) In the gaming machine of (2) above,
The effect at the start of the advantageous state, which is executed based on the information received at the start of the advantageous state, is set to have a higher display priority than the specific display,
The specific display may be erased (for example, FIGS. 14-9(H) to 14-9(J)) during the effect period at the start of the advantageous state.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling distrustful of the player due to the continuous display of the specific display, and to suitably execute the notification effect.

(4) In any one of the gaming machines (1) to (3) above,
There are a plurality of predetermined timings,
The specific timing may be a timing later than the last timing among a plurality of predetermined timings (eg, FIG. 14-4).
According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable due to the specific display being erased in a situation where the execution timing of the specific display erasing effect still remains.

(5) In any one of the gaming machines (1) to (4) above,
The specific display means can display the specific display in one of a plurality of display modes including at least a first mode and a second mode that is more advantageous to the player than the first mode. ,
When the specific display is displayed in the second mode and the specific display is not erased at the predetermined timing due to the occurrence of a predetermined event, the display mode of the specific display is changed to the first display mode at the specific timing. It may be possible to execute control to change from the mode to the second mode (eg, FIGS. 14-11).
According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling distrustful of the player due to the continuous display of the specific display of the second mode, and it is possible to suitably execute the notification effect.

(Explanation relating to association of characteristic parts)
Each configuration relating to a characteristic portion may be appropriately combined with part or all of each configuration relating to another characteristic portion. Features that are combined in this way, or individual features that are not combined, may be combined with part or all of each configuration relating to other features as appropriate.

It should be considered that the embodiments disclosed this time are illustrative in all respects and not restrictive. The scope of the present invention is indicated by the scope of the claims rather than the above description, and is intended to include all modifications within the meaning and range of equivalents of the scope of the claims.

1 Pachinko game machine 4A First special symbol display device 4B Second special symbol display device 5 Image display device 103 CPU
120 Production control CPU

Claims (1)

A gaming machine that performs variable display and can be controlled in an advantageous state for a player,
display means;
light emitting means;
hold storage means capable of storing information on variable display as hold information;
a notification effect executing means capable of executing a notification effect for notifying that the suspension information corresponding to being controlled to the advantageous state is stored in the suspension storage means when being controlled to the advantageous state;
specific display means capable of displaying a specific display when the notification effect is executed;
erasing effect executing means capable of executing a specific display erasing effect for erasing the specific display at a predetermined timing of the variable display corresponding to the specific display;
variable winning means capable of changing between a first state in which the game medium is easy to win and a second state in which the game medium cannot or is difficult to win;
A control means capable of executing a round game that changes the variable winning means to the first state,
when the specific display is not erased at the predetermined timing due to the occurrence of a predetermined event when the specific display is displayed, the specific display can be erased at a specific timing after the predetermined timing;
When the round game is played, after a predetermined period of time after the variable winning means changes from the second state to the first state, a given amount display regarding the given amount of game value is displayed;
when the game medium does not win the variable winning means within the predetermined period, a predetermined display corresponding to the fact that the game value is not awarded at the start of the display of the awarded amount can be displayed;
When the game medium wins the variable winning means within the predetermined period, a count-up display corresponding to the awarding of the game value is performed at the start of the display of the award amount, and then a specific display different from the predetermined display is displayed. A game machine that can be displayed.

Images